Service

Repair Manual
Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment
Edition 08.2020

cardiagn.com

Service Department. Technical Information

 Service
List of Workshop Manual Repair Groups

Repair Group
00 - General, Technical Data
27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control
90 - Instruments
92 - Wiper/Washer Systems
94 - Exterior Lights, Switches
96 - Interior Lights, Switches
97 - Wiring

cardiagn.com

Technical information should always be available to the foremen and mechanics, because their
careful and constant adherence to the instructions is essential to ensure vehicle road-worthiness
and safety. In addition, the normal basic safety precautions for working on motor vehicles must, as
a matter of course, be observed.

All rights reserved.

No reproduction without prior agreement from publisher.

Copyright © 2020 Volkswagen AG, Wolfsburg D4B809BB95D

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Contents

00 - General, Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Safety Precautions when Working on Vehicles with Start/Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Safety Precautions during Road Test with Testing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Repair Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1 Contact Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.2 Line Routing and Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.1 Battery, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3.2 Battery Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1 Overview - Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 Battery, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

cardiagn.com
1.4 Battery Tray, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.5 Battery, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.6 Battery, Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.7 Ground Cable with Battery Monitoring Control Module J367, Removing and Installing . . . . 18
1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module J367, Adapting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2 Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.1 Overview - Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.3 Generator, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.4 Ribbed Belt Pulley, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.5 Voltage Regulator, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.1 Overview - Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.2 Starter, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4 Cruise Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5 Start/Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5.1 General Description - Start/Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.1 Component Location Overview - Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.2 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6.3 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
7 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

90 - Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1.1 Overview - Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1.2 Instrument Cluster KX2, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.1 Overview - Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.2 High Tone Horn H2/Low Tone Horn H7, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

92 - Wiper/Washer Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1 Windshield Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1.1 Overview - Windshield Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Contents i
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1.2 Windshield Wiper, Bringing into Service Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

1.3 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1.4 Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
1.5 Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
1.6 Windshield Wiper Motor V, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1.7 Windshield Wiper Motor, Deactivating Alternating Park Position Function . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1.8 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2 Windshield Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.1 Overview - Windshield Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.2 Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.3 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.4 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.5 Washer Nozzles, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.6 Washer Nozzles, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3 Rear Window Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.1 Overview - Rear Window Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.2 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.3 Wiper Arm, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.4 Wiper Arm, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

cardiagn.com
3.5 Rear Window Wiper Motor V12, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4 Rear Window Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.1 Overview - Rear Window Washer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.2 Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.3 Rear Window Washer Pump, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.4 Washer Nozzle, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.5 Washer Nozzle, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5 Washer Fluid Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.1 Washer Fluid Hoses, Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

94 - Exterior Lights, Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

1 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
1.1 Overview - Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
1.3 Headlamp, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
1.4 Headlamp Installation Position, Correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
1.5 Left Front Turn Signal Bulb M5/Right Front Turn Signal Bulb M7, Removing and Installing . . 90
1.6 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1.7 Left High Beam Headlamp Bulb M30/Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb M32, Removing
and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1.8 Left Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp LED Module L176/Right Daytime Running
Lamp and Position Lamp LED Module L177 L177, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . 91
1.9 Left Cornering Lamp Bulb L148/Right Cornering Lamp Bulb L149, Removing and Installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1.10 Right LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1 A27/Left LED Headlamp Power Output
Module 1 A31, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1.11 Turn Signal Control Module, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2 Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2.1 Front Side Marker Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2.2 Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3 Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.1 Overview - Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.2 Turn Signal, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.3 Exterior Rearview Mirror Entry Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4 Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

ii Contents
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

4.1 Overview - Body Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

4.2 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
4.3 Rear Lid Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4.4 Lower Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.5 Bulb Holder, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.6 Right Tail Lamp Bulb M2/Left Tail Lamp Bulb M4, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4.7 Left Rear Fog Lamp Bulb L46/Right Rear Fog Lamp Bulb L47, Removing and Installing . . 105
4.8 Left Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb M21/Right Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb M22, Removing and Installing . 105 .
4.9 Back-Up Lamp Bulb, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
4.10 Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5 High-Mounted Brake Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.1 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.2 High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.1 Overview - License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.2 Left License Plate Lamp X4/Right License Plate Lamp X5, Removing and Installing . . . . 110
6.3 Bulb for Left License Plate Lamp X4/Right License Plate Lamp X5, Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
7 Access/Start Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

cardiagn.com
7.1 Component Location Overview - Access/Start Authorization System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
7.2 Component Location Overview - Keyless Access Authorization System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
7.3 Access/Start System Interface J965, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
7.4 Left Front Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor G605 and Right Front Exterior Door Handle
Touch Sensor G606, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
7.5 Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior R138, Removing and Installing . . . . . . 116
7.6 Access/Start System Antenna 2 in Vehicle Interior R139, Removing and Installing . . . . . . 117
7.7 Left Access/Start Authorization Antenna R200, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
7.8 Right Access/Start Authorization Antenna R201, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
7.9 Access/Start System Antenna in Rear Bumper R136, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . 118
7.10 Access/Start System Antenna in Luggage Compartment R137, Removing and Installing . . 118
7.11 Driver Side Rear Access/Start Authorization Antenna R155 and Passenger Side Rear
Access/Start Authorization Antenna R156, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
7.12 Power Rear Lid Opening Control Module J938, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
7.13 Power Rear Lid Opening Sensor G750/Power Rear Lid Opening Sensor 2 G760,
Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
8 Steering Column Switch Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8.2 Lock Cylinder, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
8.3 Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid N376, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
8.4 Ignition/Starter Switch, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
8.5 Steering Column Switch Module, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8.6 Steering Column Electronics Control Module J527, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . 131
8.7 Turn Signal Switch E2, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
8.8 Cruise Control Switch E45, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
8.9 Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch E22, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
8.10 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil D2, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
8.11 Steering Column Combination Switch Base Carrier, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . 137
8.12 Steering Lock Housing, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
9 Parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
9.1 Overview - Parking Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
9.2 Parking Aid Control Module J446, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
9.3 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H22, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
9.4 Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer H15, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
9.5 Front Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
9.6 Rear Parking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10 Parallel Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Contents iii
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

10.1 Overview - Parallel Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

10.2 Parallel Parking Assistance Control Module J791, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
10.3 Front Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
10.4 Rear Sensor, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11 Automatic Headlamp Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
11.1 Overview - Automatic Headlamp Range Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
11.2 Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Module J745, Removing and Installing . . 149
12 Trailer Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.1 Overview - Trailer Hitch Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.2 Trailer Socket U10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.3 Towing Recognition Control Module J345, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
13 Blind Spot Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
13.1 Overview - Blind Spot Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
13.2 Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Left and Right Exterior Mirror K303/K304,
Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
13.3 Blind Spot Detection Control Module J1086 / Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 J1087,
Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
13.4 Blind Spot Detection, Calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
14 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

cardiagn.com
96 - Interior Lights, Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
1 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
1.1 Component Location Overview - Instrument Panel Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
1.2 Component Location Overview - Front Door Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
1.3 Component Location Overview - Center Console Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
1.4 Component Location Overview - Luggage Compartment Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
1.5 Component Location Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
1.6 Glove Compartment Lamp W6, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
1.7 Bulb for Glove Compartment Lamp W6, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
1.8 Left Front Footwell Lamp K268/Right Front Footwell Lamp K269, Removing and Installing . 1. 75
1.9 Left Front Footwell Illumination Bulb L151/Right Front Footwell Illumination Bulb L152,
Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
1.10 Central Locking -Safe- Indicator Lamp K133, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
1.11 Left Front Entry Lamp W31/Right Front Entry Lamp W32, Removing and Installing . . . . . . 177
1.12 Left Front Entry Lamp W31/Right Front Entry Lamp W32, Bulb Removing and Installing . . 178
1.13 Driver Door Warning Lamp W30/Front Passenger Door Warning Lamp W36, Removing
and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
1.14 Left Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 1 L199/Right Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 1
L200, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
1.15 Instrument Panel Contour Illumination Lamp 1 L243, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . 179
1.16 Instrument Panel Contour Illumination Lamp 2 L244/Instrument Panel Contour Illumination
Lamp 3 L245, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
1.17 Selector Lever Transmission Range Position Display Unit Y26, Removing and Installing . . 181
1.18 Luggage Compartment Lamp W3/Luggage Compartment Lamp 2 W115, Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
1.19 Luggage Compartment Lamp W3/Luggage Compartment Lamp 2 W115, Bulb Removing
and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
1.20 Driver Vanity Mirror Lamp W20/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp W14, Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
1.21 Bulb for Front Interior Lamp W1, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
1.22 Bulb for Rear Interior Lamp W43, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
1.23 Interior Lamp W64 Bulb, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
1.24 Left Front Reading Lamp W65 and Right Front Reading Lamp W66, Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
1.25 Left Rear Reading Lamp W11/Right Rear Reading Lamp W12, Removing and Installing . . 189
1.26 Left Rear Interior Lamp W47/Right Rear Interior Lamp W48, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
2 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

iv Contents
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

2.1 Component Location Overview - Instrument Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

2.2 Component Location Overview - Controls in Front Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
2.3 Component Location Overview - Controls in Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
2.4 Component Location Overview - Controls in Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
2.5 Component Location Overview - Controls in Luggage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
2.6 Component Location Overview - Controls in Roof Trim Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
2.7 Rotary Light Switch EX1, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
2.8 Parking Aid Button E266, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
2.9 Steering Wheel Heating Button E522, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
2.10 Parallel Parking Assistance Button E581, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
2.11 Start/Stop Mode Button E693, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
2.12 Center Console Switch Module 1 EX23, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
2.13 Center Console Switch Module 2 EX30, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
2.14 Driving Profile Selection Control Head E881, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
2.15 Emergency Flasher Switch EX3, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
2.16 Left Seat Heating Button E653/Right Seat Heating Button E654, Removing and Installing . .204
2.17 Glove Compartment Lamp Switch E26, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
2.18 Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster EX11, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
2.19 Power Window Control Head in Driver Door E512, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . 206

cardiagn.com
2.20 Front Passenger Power Window Button E716, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
2.21 Driver Interior Locking Button E308/Front Passenger Interior Locking Button E309,
Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
2.22 Rear Lid Remote Release Button E233, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
2.23 Interior Monitoring and Vehicle Inclination Deactivation Button E616, Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
2.24 Driver Door Contact Switch F2/Front Passenger Door Contact Switch F3, Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
2.25 Driver Side Rear Power Window Button E711/Passenger Side Rear Power Window Button
E713, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
2.26 Left Rear Door Contact Switch F10/Right Rear Door Contact Switch F11, Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
2.27 Electromechanical Parking Brake Button E538/-Auto Hold- Button E540, Removing and
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
2.28 Start System Button E378, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
2.29 Rear Lid Warning Buzzer H32, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
2.30 Rear Lid Contact Switch, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
2.31 Rear Lid Lock Button in Luggage Compartment E406, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . 212
2.32 Driver Vanity Mirror Lamp Contact Switch F147/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp
Contact Switch F148, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2.33 Sunroof Button E325, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2.34 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.35 Rear Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.36 Third Row Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
2.37 Left Front Reading Lamp Button E633/Right Front Reading Lamp Button E634, Removing
and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
2.38 Roof Shade Button 1 E584, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
2.39 Garage Door Opener Control Head E284, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
3 Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
3.1 Overview - Interior Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
3.2 Alarm Horn H12, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
3.3 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor G578, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
4 Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
4.1 Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
5 Cigarette Lighter and Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
5.1 Cigarette Lighter U1, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
5.2 Socket Illumination Bulb L42, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
5.3 Rear Cigarette Lighter Illumination Bulb L32, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Contents v
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

5.4 Socket U, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

5.5 Converter with Socket, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
6 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

97 - Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
1 Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
1.1 Component Location Overview - Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
1.2 E-Box, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
1.3 Relay and Fuse Panels in E-Box, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
1.4 Relay and Fuse Panel Behind Instrument Panel, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
1.5 Main Fuse Panel, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
2 Control Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
2.1 Component Location Overview - Control Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
2.2 Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
2.3 Data Bus on Board Diagnostic Interface J533, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
2.4 Bracket for Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519, Removing and Installing . . . . 244
2.5 Bracket for Vehicle Electrical System Control Module J519, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
2.6 Parking Aid Control Module J446/Parallel Parking Assistance Control Module J791
Bracket, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

cardiagn.com
2.7 Garage Door Opener Control Module, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
2.8 Rear Lid Control Module J605, Removing and Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
3.1 Wiring Harnesses and Connectors, Repairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4 Connector Housings, Releasing and Disassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5 Antenna Wires, Repairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
6 Fiber-Optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
7 Vehicle Diagnostic Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
8 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
9 Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

vi Contents
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

00 – General, Technical Data

1 Safety Precautions
(Edition 08.2020)
⇒ P1.1 recautions when Working on Vehicles with Start/Stop
System”, page 1
⇒ P1.2 recautions during Road Test with Testing Equipment”,
page 1

1.1 Safety Precautions when Working on

Vehicles with Start/Stop System

WARNING

There is a risk of injury if the engine starts automatically on

vehicles with a Start/Stop System.
♦ If necessary, the engine can be started automatically

cardiagn.com
on vehicles with an activated Start/Stop System. A mes‐
sage will appear in the instrument cluster.
♦ Make sure that the Start/Stop System is deactivated
when working on the vehicle (turn off ignition; if needed,
turn the ignition back on).

1.2 Safety Precautions during Road Test

with Testing Equipment
If the use of testing equipment is required during a test drive,
observe the following:

WARNING

Distractions and testing equipment that is not secured prop‐

erly increases the risk of an accident.
There is a risk that the front passenger airbag may deploy
during an accident.
• Operating testing equipment while driving causes dis‐
tractions.
• Unsecured testing equipment poses an increased risk of
personal injury.
♦ Always secure testing equipment on the rear seat with
a strap and have a second technician operate the equip‐
ment from the rear seat.

1. Safety Precautions 1
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

2 Repair Information
⇒ C2.1 orrosion”, page 2
⇒ R2.2 outing and Securing”, page 2

2.1 Contact Corrosion

Contact corrosion can occur if incorrect fasteners (bolts, nuts,
washers, etc.) are used.
For this reason, only fasteners with a special surface coating
are installed.
In addition, rubber or plastic parts and adhesives are made of
non-conductive materials.
If there are doubts as to whether parts are suitable or not, use
new parts. Refer to the Parts Catalog.
Note:
♦ Only use original replacement parts that have been tested
and are compatible with aluminum.

cardiagn.com
♦ Use only Volkswagen accessories.
♦ Contact corrosion damage is not covered under warranty.

2.2 Line Routing and Securing

♦ Wires should be marked before they are removed to pre‐
vent confusing them and to guarantee the installation posi‐
tion. This also includes fuel lines, hydraulic lines, vacuum
lines, EVAP systems and electrical lines. If necessary, draw
sketches or take pictures.
♦ Due to limited space in the engine compartment, make sure
there is enough clearance to all moving or hot components
to avoid damaging the lines/wires.

2 Rep. Gr.00 - General, Technical Data

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

3 Battery
⇒ G3.1 eneral Information”, page 3
⇒ T3.2 ypes”, page 3

3.1 Battery, General Information

Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep.
Gr. 27; Battery.

3.2 Battery Types

Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep.
Gr. 27; Battery; Battery Types.

cardiagn.com

3. Battery 3
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

27 – Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

1 Battery
⇒ -1.1 Battery”, page 4
⇒ R1.2 emoving and Installing”, page 8
⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Connecting”, page 15
⇒ T1.4 ray, Removing and Installing”, page 17
⇒ C1.5 hecking”, page 18
⇒ C1.6 harging”, page 18
⇒ C1.7 able with Battery Monitoring Control ModuleJ367, Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 18
⇒ B1.8 attery Monitoring Control ModuleJ367, Adapting”, page
19

1.1 Overview - Battery

cardiagn.com
⇒ -1.1.1 Battery, Vehicles without Main Fuse Panel”, page 4
⇒ -1.1.2 Battery, Vehicles with Main Fuse Panel”, page 6

1.1.1 Overview - Battery, Vehicles without Main Fuse Panel

4 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Heat Shield Boot

2 - Cover
❑ For positive terminal
❑ Not installed on all ve‐
hicles
3 - Cover
❑ For negative terminal
4 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
5 - Connector
❑ For the Battery Moni‐
toring Control Module -
J367-
❑ Follow the sequence
when connecting the
ground cable. Refer to
⇒ D1.3 isconnecting
and Connecting”, page

cardiagn.com
15 .
6 - Nut
❑ 9 Nm
7 - Ground Wire
8 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
9 - Ground Wire
❑ With battery termi‐
nal clamp and Bat‐
tery Monitoring Control
Module -J367-
❑ Battery Monitoring Con‐
trol Module -J367-,
Adapting. Refer to ⇒
B1.8 attery Monitoring Control ModuleJ367, Adapting”, page 19 .
❑ Disconnecting and Connecting. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Connecting”, page 15 .
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ C1.7 able with Battery Monitoring Control ModuleJ367, Removing
and Installing”, page 18 .
10 - Battery
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ R1.2.1 emoving and Installing, Vehicles without Main Fuse Panel”,
page 8 .
❑ Disconnecting and Connecting. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Connecting”, page 15 .
❑ Replacing on vehicles with Start/Stop System. Refer to ⇒ page 10 .
11 - Bolts
❑ 9 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
12 - Battery Tray
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ T1.4 ray, Removing and Installing”, page 17 .
13 - Bracket
14 - Bolt
❑ 20 Nm
15 - Positive Cable

1. Battery 5
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020
❑ With battery terminal clamp
❑ Disconnecting and Connecting. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Connecting”, page 15 .
16 - Cap
❑ For positive cable

1.1.2 Overview - Battery, Vehicles with Main Fuse Panel

cardiagn.com

6 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Heat Shield Boot

2 - Cap
❑ Clipped in with the
main fuse panel
3 - Nut
❑ Tightening specifica‐
tion. Refer to -item 7- ⇒
Item 7 (page 233) .
4 - Main Fuse Panel
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒
F1.1.3 use Panel on
Battery”, page 232 .
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
F1.5 use Panel, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 238 .
5 - Bracket

cardiagn.com
❑ Clipped on the Battery
-A-
6 - Cover
❑ For negative terminal
7 - Connector
❑ For the Battery Moni‐
toring Control Module -
J367-
❑ Follow the sequence
when connecting the
ground cable. Refer to
⇒ D1.3 isconnecting
and Connecting”, page
15 .
8 - Nut
❑ 9 Nm
9 - Ground Wire
10 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
11 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
12 - Ground Wire
❑ With battery terminal clamp and Battery Monitoring Control Module -J367-
❑ Battery Monitoring Control Module -J367-, Adapting. Refer to ⇒ B1.8 attery Monitoring Control Modu‐
leJ367, Adapting”, page 19 .
❑ Disconnecting and Connecting. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Connecting”, page 15 .
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ C1.7 able with Battery Monitoring Control ModuleJ367, Removing
and Installing”, page 18 .
13 - Battery
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ R1.2.2 emoving and Installing, Vehicles with Main Fuse Panel”,
page 11 .
❑ Disconnecting and Connecting. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Connecting”, page 15 .
❑ Replacing on vehicles with Start/Stop System. Refer to ⇒ page 14 .
14 - Bolts

1. Battery 7
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020
❑ 9 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
15 - Battery Tray
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ T1.4 ray, Removing and Installing”, page 17 .
16 - Bracket
17 - Screw
❑ 20 Nm
18 - Positive Cable
❑ With battery terminal clamp
❑ Disconnecting and Connecting. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Connecting”, page 15 .
19 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
20 - Cover
❑ For positive terminal

1.2 Battery, Removing and Installing

cardiagn.com
⇒ R1.2.1 emoving and Installing, Vehicles without Main Fuse
Panel”, page 8
⇒ R1.2.2 emoving and Installing, Vehicles with Main Fuse Pan‐
el”, page 11

1.2.1 Battery, Removing and Installing, Vehi‐

cles without Main Fuse Panel
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench, 6-50Nm -VAG1331A-
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm -VAG1783-
Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent the
ignition from switching on unintentionally.
– Open the heat shield boot cover.
– Open the cover -4- over the battery negative terminal.

8 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Loosen the nut -6- several turns.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the battery ground cable terminal clamp -5- from
the battery negative terminal.
– If installed, open the cover -3- over the battery positive termi‐
nal.
– Loosen the nut -2- several turns.
– Remove the battery positive cable terminal clamp -1- from
the battery positive terminal.
– Pull the heat shield boot -4- slightly upward.

– Remove the bolt -2- from the bracket -1-.

– Remove the bracket -1-.
– Lift the battery -3- out of the engine compartment at a 45°
angle.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

1. Battery 9
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Caution

A loosely mounted battery may cause the following hazards:

♦ Shortened service life due to vibration damage (explo‐
sion hazard).
♦ If the battery is not secured properly, the plates within
the battery can be damaged.
♦ Damage to the battery housing caused by the bracket
(possible electrolyte leakage, high subsequent costs).
♦ Inadequate crash safety.

Note

♦ Only maintenance-free batteries conforming to standards

“TL82506” (from 12/1997) and “VW75073” (from 08/2001)
may be installed.

cardiagn.com
♦ Batteries from the replacement parts program have a base
strip adapter for adapting to different clamping strips.
♦ For information on whether to use the base strip adapter and
how to use it. Refer to the Battery Owner's Manual.

Vehicles with Start/Stop System

Note

♦ Vehicles with the Start/Stop System have a special battery

due to the increased load on the cycles.
♦ When replacing the battery, note the correct replacement
part identification.
♦ Batteries for vehicles with the Start/Stop System have
“AGM” (Absorbent Glass Mat) or “EFB” (Enhanced Flooded
Battery) marked on them.

Continuation for All Vehicles

– Insert the battery into the battery tray -1- so that the battery
clamping strip touches the rear and side stops -arrows-.

• It must not be possible to slide the battery rearward or to the

side.
– Install the bracket -1-.

10 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

• The tab -arrow- on the bracket -1- must engage into the

cardiagn.com
opening on the battery clamping strip.
– Tighten the bolt -2- for the bracket -1-.
– Check the battery for secure fit.
When the ignition and electrical equipment are switched off,
connect the battery in the following sequence:
– Install the battery positive cable terminal clamp -3- on the
battery positive terminal “+”.
– Tighten the nut -4-.
– Connect the battery. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Con‐
necting”, page 15 .

Note

If the battery is replaced, the Battery Monitoring Control Module

-J367- must be adapted. Refer to ⇒ B1.8 attery Monitoring Con‐
trol ModuleJ367, Adapting”, page 19 .

Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -1.1.1 Battery, Vehicles without Main Fuse Pan‐
el”, page 4

1.2.2 Battery, Removing and Installing, Vehi‐

cles with Main Fuse Panel
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench, 6-50Nm -VAG1331A-
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm -VAG1783-
Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent the
ignition from switching on unintentionally.
– Open the heat shield boot cover.
– Open the cover -1- over the battery negative terminal.

1. Battery 11
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Loosen the nut -5- several turns.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the battery ground cable terminal clamp -6- from
the battery negative terminal.
– Unclip the cover -4- over the battery positive terminal.
– Release the retaining tabs -2- and open the cover -3-.
– Remove the nut -3-.

– Release the catches on the bracket -1- in the direction of

-arrow-.
– At the same time remove the bracket -1- with main fuse
panel -2- and the wires attached upward and move to the
side.
– Loosen the nut -5- several turns.
– Remove the battery positive cable terminal clamp -4- from
the battery positive terminal.
– Pull the heat shield boot -4- slightly upward.

12 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the bolt -2- from the bracket -1-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the bracket -1-.
– Lift the battery -3- out of the engine compartment at a 45°
angle.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Caution

A loosely mounted battery may cause the following hazards:

♦ Shortened service life due to vibration damage (explo‐
sion hazard).
♦ If the battery is not secured properly, the plates within
the battery can be damaged.
♦ Damage to the battery housing caused by the bracket
(possible electrolyte leakage, high subsequent costs).
♦ Inadequate crash safety.

Note

♦ Only maintenance-free batteries conforming to standards

“TL82506” (from 12/1997) and “VW75073” (from 08/2001)
may be installed.
♦ Batteries from the replacement parts program have a base
strip adapter for adapting to different clamping strips.
♦ For information on whether to use the base strip adapter and
how to use it. Refer to the Battery Owner's Manual.

1. Battery 13
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Vehicles with Start/Stop System

Note

♦ Vehicles with the Start/Stop System have a special battery

due to the increased load on the cycles.
♦ When replacing the battery, note the correct replacement
part identification.
♦ Batteries for vehicles with the Start/Stop System have
“AGM” (Absorbent Glass Mat) or “EFB” (Enhanced Flooded
Battery) marked on them.

Continuation for All Vehicles

– Insert the battery into the battery tray -1- so that the battery
clamping strip touches the rear and side stops -arrows-.

cardiagn.com
• It must not be possible to slide the battery rearward or to the
side.
– Install the bracket -1-.

• The tab -arrow- on the bracket -1- must engage into the
opening on the battery clamping strip.
– Tighten the bolt -2- for the bracket -1-.
– Check the battery for secure fit.

14 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

When the ignition and electrical equipment are switched off,

connect the battery in the following sequence:

cardiagn.com
– Attach the battery positive cable terminal clamp -4- on the
battery positive terminal “+”.
– Tighten the nut -5-.
– Place the bracket -1- with the main fuse panel -2- and con‐
nected lines on the Battery -A- and engage.
– Tighten the nut -3-.
– Close the cover on the main fuse panel.
– Connect the battery. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Con‐
necting”, page 15 .

Note

If the battery is replaced, the Battery Monitoring Control Module

-J367- must be adapted. Refer to ⇒ B1.8 attery Monitoring Con‐
trol ModuleJ367, Adapting”, page 19 .

Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -1.1.2 Battery, Vehicles with Main Fuse Panel”,
page 6

1.3 Battery, Disconnecting and Connecting

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm -VAG1783-
Disconnecting
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent the
ignition from switching on unintentionally.
– Open the cover -1- over the battery negative terminal.

1. Battery 15
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Loosen the nut -3- several turns.

– Remove the battery ground cable terminal clamp -2- from
the battery terminal.
Connecting

cardiagn.com
Pay attention to the following when connecting the battery:
– Disconnect the connector -2- from the Battery Monitoring
Control Module -J367- -3-.
– Install the battery ground cable terminal clamp by hand on
the battery negative terminal “–”.
– Tighten the nut -1-.
– Reconnect the connector -2- to the Battery Monitoring Con‐
trol Module -J367-.
– Switch the ignition on.
– Check time and adjust if necessary.
– Open and close the windows all the way.
– Then, with the windows closed, pull the power window
switch until the relay audibly switches.
– Check the window regulator convenience switch.
While operating the convenience switch, the window must close
without holding down the power window switch.

Note

After reconnecting the power supply, the ESC warning lamp

may only go out after the vehicle has been driven a few meters.

16 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -1.1 Battery”, page 4

1.4 Battery Tray, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench, 6-50Nm -VAG1331A-
Removing
– Remove the Battery -A-. Refer to ⇒ R1.2 emoving and In‐
stalling”, page 8 .
– Remove the air filter housing. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 23; Air
Filter; Air Filter Housing, Removing and Installing or ⇒ Rep.
Gr. 24; Air Filter; Air Filter Housing, Removing and Installing.
– Remove the bracket -arrows- on the wiring harness -1- from
the battery tray.

cardiagn.com
– If equipped, release the catches -3- on the NOx Sensor
Control Module -J583- -2- bracket and the remove the NOx
Sensor Control Module - J583- -2- bracket upward from the
battery tray.
– Remove the screws -arrows-.

– Remove the battery tray -1-.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

1. Battery 17
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -1.1 Battery”, page 4

1.5 Battery, Checking

Battery, Checking. Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General In‐
formation; Rep. Gr. 27; Battery, Checking.
The Battery -A- is monitored by the Data Bus On Board Diag‐
nostic Interface -J533- OBD. Use the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester,
Guided Fault Finding .

1.6 Battery, Charging

Battery, Charging. Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General In‐
formation; Rep. Gr. 27; Battery, Charging.

1.7 Ground Cable with Battery Monitoring

Control Module -J367-, Removing and
Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required

cardiagn.com
♦ Torque Wrench, 6-50Nm -VAG1331A-
Removing

– Remove the Battery -A-. Refer to ⇒ R1.2 emoving and In‐

stalling”, page 8 .
– Disconnect the connector -2- from the Battery Monitoring
Control Module -J367- -3-.
– Remove the nut -1- for the ground cable -2-.

18 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the nut -3-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the ground cable with the Battery Monitoring Con‐
trol Module -J367- -4-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Adapt the Battery Monitoring Control Module -J367-. Use the
Vehicle Diagnostic Tester. Refer to ⇒ B1.8 attery Monitoring
Control ModuleJ367, Adapting”, page 19 .
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -1.1 Battery”, page 4

1.8 Battery Monitoring Control Module -

J367-, Adapting
After installing a new battery or a new Battery Monitoring
Control Module -J367-, the Battery Monitoring Control Module
-J367- must be adapted.
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester. Refer to ⇒ D7 iag‐
nostic Tester”, page 253 .
– Adapt the Battery Monitoring Control Module -J367-. Use the
Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

1. Battery 19
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

2 Generator
⇒ -2.1 Generator”, page 20
⇒ R2.2 emoving and Installing”, page 20
⇒ C2.3 hecking”, page 22
⇒ B2.4 elt Pulley, Removing and Installing”, page 22
⇒ R2.5 egulator, Removing and Installing”, page 29

2.1 Overview - Generator

1 - Generator
❑ Ribbed Belt Pulley, Re‐
moving and installing.
Refer to ⇒ B2.4 elt Pul‐
ley, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 22 .
❑ Voltage Regulator -C1-,
Removing and instal‐

cardiagn.com
ling. Refer to ⇒
R2.5 egulator, Remov‐
ing and Installing”,
page 29 .
❑ Checking. Refer to ⇒
C2.3 hecking”, page
22 .
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
R2.2 emoving and In‐
stalling”, page 20 .
2 - Bolts
❑ 23 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
3 - Bushings
❑ Loosen the bushings
❑ Quantity: 2
4 - Connector
5 - Cap
6 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
7 - 30/B+ Terminal
8 - Nut
❑ 3.2 Nm
9 - Wire Clamp
10 - Threaded Pin
❑ 3.2 Nm

2.2 Generator, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench, 6-50Nm -VAG1331A-

20 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Removing
– Disconnect the ground cable from the battery when the igni‐
tion is switched off. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Con‐
necting”, page 15 .
– Remove the ribbed belt. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 13; Cylinder
Block, Belt Pulley Side; Ribbed Belt, Removing and Instal‐
ling.
– Remove the upper ribbed belt idler roller. Refer to ⇒ Rep.
Gr. 13; Cylinder Block, Belt Pulley Side; Overview - Cylinder
Block, Belt Pulley Side.
Vehicles with A/C System
– Remove the A/C compressor. Refer to ⇒ Heating, Ventilation
and Air Conditioning; Rep. Gr. 87; A/C Compressor; A/C
Compressor Removing and Installing.
Continuation for All Vehicles
– Bring the lock carrier into the service position. Refer to
⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 50; Lock Carrier; Bringing into
Service Position and Resetting.
– Remove the bolts -arrows-.

Note cardiagn.com
♦ If the Generator -C- -1- is stuck in its bracket, install the bolts
again except for two turns.
♦ Carefully strike the bolt heads using the flat side of the ham‐
mer - doing this loosens the generator mount bushings.

– Remove the Generator -C- -1- with the wires still attached
from the bracket.
– Release and disconnect the connector -5-.
– Pry off the cap -4-.
– Remove the nut and remove the terminal 30/B+ wire -3-.
– Remove the nut -6- and remove the wire clamp -2-.
– Guide the Generator -C- -1- out downward to the right.

2. Generator 21
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Push the generator mount bushings back slightly to make it
easier to install the Generator -C-.

Note

Make sure that the generator mount bushings slide freely and
are not too tight (loosen them if necessary). Otherwise the
clamping force of the bushings will be too low even if the correct
tightening specification is used.

– Connect the battery. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Con‐

necting”, page 15 .
– After completed work always start the engine and check the
belt routing.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -2.1 Generator”, page 20

cardiagn.com
2.3 Generator, Checking
– Check the Generator -C- using the Vehicle Diagnostic Test‐
er.

2.4 Ribbed Belt Pulley, Removing and In‐

stalling
⇒ B2.4.1 elt Pulley without Freewheel, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 22
⇒ B2.4.2 elt Pulley with Freewheel, Removing and Installing,
Bosch”, page 23
⇒ B2.4.3 elt Pulley with Freewheel, Removing and Installing,
Valeo”, page 25
⇒ B2.4.4 elt Pulley with Freewheel, Removing and Installing”,
page 26

2.4.1 Ribbed Belt Pulley without Freewheel,

Removing and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Generator Belt Socket -3310-
♦ Torque Wrench, 40-200Nm -VAG1332A-
Removing
– Remove the Generator -C-. Refer to ⇒ R2.2 emoving and
Installing”, page 20 .
– Secure the Generator -C- in a vise by the mounting points.
– Remove the ribbed belt pulley nut from the generator shaft
using the -3310-.

22 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the ribbed belt pulley from the generator shaft.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
Tightening Specifications
Component Tightening Specification

cardiagn.com
Ribbed belt pulley nut 65 Nm

2.4.2 Ribbed Belt Pulley with Freewheel, Re‐

moving and Installing, Bosch
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Multi-Tooth Adapter -3400-
♦ Torque Wrench, 40-200Nm -VAG1332A-
Removing
– Remove the Generator -C-. Refer to ⇒ R2.2 emoving and
Installing”, page 20 .
– Secure the Generator -C- in a vise by the mounting points.
– Pry up the cap from the ribbed belt pulley.
– Insert the -3400- with the wrench (17 mm) into the ribbed
belt pulley.

2. Generator 23
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Insert an M10 multi-point socket -1- into the generator shaft.

– Hold the generator shaft securely and loosen the ribbed belt
pulley with the wrench by turning left.
– Hold the ribbed belt pulley securely by hand.
– Turn the generator shaft until the ribbed belt pulley can be
removed.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Install the ribbed belt pulley all the way onto the generator
shaft by hand.
The generator must be re-assembled as follows to install the
ribbed belt pulley:
– Release the socket -1- and pull it out of the handle -2-.

cardiagn.com
– Turn the handle -2- 180° and install the socket -1- again.
– Set the rotation direction of the -VAG1332- socket to the left.
– Insert an M10 multi-point socket -1- into the generator shaft.

– Counterhold the -3400- with the wrench (17 mm).

– Tighten the ribbed belt pulley by turning the generator shaft
to the left using the -VAG1332-.

24 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Tightening Specifications
Component Tightening Specification
Ribbed belt pulley nut 80 Nm

2.4.3 Ribbed Belt Pulley with Freewheel, Re‐

moving and Installing, Valeo
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Multi-Tooth Adapter -3400-
♦ Torque Wrench, 40-200Nm -VAG1332A-
♦ Torx Key Socket Set -VAG1603A/1-
Removing
– Remove the Generator -C-. Refer to ⇒ R2.2 emoving and
Installing”, page 20 .
– Secure the Generator -C- in a vise by the mounting points.

cardiagn.com
– Pry up the cap from the ribbed belt pulley.
– Insert the -3400- with the wrench (17 mm) into the ribbed
belt pulley.

– Install the -VAG1603/1- in the generator shaft.

– Hold the generator shaft securely and loosen the ribbed belt
pulley with the wrench by turning left.
– Hold the ribbed belt pulley securely by hand.
– Turn the generator shaft until the ribbed belt pulley can be
removed.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Install the ribbed belt pulley all the way onto the generator
shaft by hand.
The -VAG1332A- must be rearranged as follows to install the
decoupling belt pulley:

2. Generator 25
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release the socket -1- and pull it out of the handle -2-.

– Turn the handle -2- 180° and install the socket -1- again.
– Set the rotation direction of the -VAG1332- socket to the left.
– Install the -VAG1603/1- in the generator shaft.

cardiagn.com
– Counterhold the -3400- with the wrench (17 mm).
– Tighten the ribbed belt pulley by turning the generator shaft
to the left using the -VAG1332-.
Tightening Specifications
Component Tightening Specification
Ribbed belt pulley nut 80 Nm

2.4.4 Decoupling Belt Pulley with Freewheel,

Removing and Installing
General Description
There are different versions of the decoupling belt pulley with
freewheel.
Before removing, check which special tool must be used to
remove the installed decoupling belt pulley with freewheel.

26 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Caution

The length of the ribbed belt varies depending on the instal‐

led decoupling belt pulley with freewheel.
Check which decoupling belt pulley with freewheel is instal‐
led and make sure that the correct ribbed belt will be instal‐
led. For the ribbed belt allocation. Refer to the Electronic
Parts Catalog (ETKA).

Decoupler differentiation:
-A- Small decoupling belt pulley with freewheel, use Adapter
-T10474-
-B- Large decoupling belt pulley with freewheel, use Multi-Tooth
Adapter -3400-

cardiagn.com
Note

The ribbed belt for the large decoupling belt pulley with free‐
wheel must be larger because the decoupling belt pulley with
freewheel has a larger diameter.

Special tools and workshop equipment required

♦ Adapter -T10474-
♦ Multi-Tooth Adapter -3400-
♦ Torque Wrench, 40-200Nm -VAG1332A-
♦ 8 mm Inner Hex Socket or TORX T50
Removing
– Remove the Generator -C-. Refer to ⇒ R2.2 emoving and
Installing”, page 20 .
– Secure the Generator -C- in a vise by the mounting points.
– If equipped, remove the cap from the decoupling belt pulley
with freewheel.
– Install the -T10474- or -3400- -1- in the belt pulley and attach
a wrench.

2. Generator 27
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Place a suitable tool -2- in the generator shaft.

cardiagn.com
– Turn the generator shaft clockwise to loosen and counter‐
hold with the wrench while doing so.
– Hold the decoupling belt pulley with freewheel in place by
hand and turn it at the generator shaft until the decoupling
belt pulley with freewheel can be removed.
Installing:
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
The -VAG1332A- must be rearranged as follows to install the
decoupling belt pulley with freewheel:
– Release the socket -1- and pull it out of the handle -2-.

– Turn the torque wrench handle -2- 180° and reinsert the
socket.
– Set the rotation direction of the -VAG1332- socket to the left.
– Install the ribbed belt pulley with freewheel all the way onto
the generator shaft by hand.
– Install the -T10474- -1- in the decoupling belt pulley with
freewheel and attach the wrench.

28 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Place a suitable tool -2- in the generator shaft.

cardiagn.com
– Turn the generator shaft counter-clockwise using the -
VAG1332- -3- to tighten the decoupling belt pulley with free‐
wheel.
Tightening Specifications
Component Tightening Specification
Ribbed belt pulley nut 80 Nm

2.5 Voltage Regulator, Removing and In‐

stalling
⇒ R2.5.1 egulator, Removing and Installing, Bosch”, page 29
⇒ R2.5.2 egulator, Removing and Installing, Valeo”, page 30

2.5.1 Voltage Regulator, Removing and In‐

stalling, Bosch
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-
Removing
– Remove the Generator -C-. Refer to ⇒ R2.2 emoving and
Installing”, page 20 .
– Carefully pry the cap -1- off of the Generator -C-.

2. Generator 29
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the screws -arrows- for the Voltage Regulator -C1-.

– Remove the Voltage Regulator -C1- from the Generator -C-.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Tightening Specifications

cardiagn.com
Component Tightening Specification
Voltage Regulator -C1- Bolts 2 Nm

2.5.2 Voltage Regulator, Removing and In‐

stalling, Valeo
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm -VAG1783-
Removing
– Remove the Generator -C-. Refer to ⇒ R2.2 emoving and
Installing”, page 20 .
– Carefully pry the cap -1- off of the Generator -C-.

– Remove the Voltage Regulator -C1- -3- bolts -2-.

30 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the Voltage Regulator -C1- -3- from the Generator

-C-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Install the Voltage Regulator -C1-.
– Press the cap on the carbon brushes -A- downward in di‐

cardiagn.com
rection of -arrow- until it is flush with the voltage regulator
housing.

– Install the new cap -1- for the Generator -C-.

Tightening Specifications
Component Tightening Specification
Voltage Regulator -C1- Bolts 4 Nm

2. Generator 31
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

3 Starter
⇒ -3.1 Starter”, page 32
⇒ R3.2 emoving and Installing”, page 32

3.1 Overview - Starter

1 - Starter -B-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
R3.2 emoving and In‐
stalling”, page 32 .
2 - Double Bolt
❑ 80 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
3 - Connector
4 - Cap

cardiagn.com
5 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
6 - 30/B+ Terminal
7 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
8 - Bracket
❑ For wiring harness

3.2 Starter, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench, 6-50Nm -VAG1331A-
♦ Torque Wrench, 40-200Nm -VAG1332A-
Removing
– Disconnect the ground cable to the Battery -A- when the
ignition is switched off. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and
Connecting”, page 15 .
– Remove the noise insulation. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 66; Noise Insulation; Overview - Noise Insulation.

32 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the air filter housing. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 24; Air
Filter; Air Filter Housing, Removing and Installing.
– Disconnect the connector -1-.

cardiagn.com
– Pry up the cap -2-.
– Remove the nut -3- and terminal 30/B+.
– Remove the nut -2- for the bracket -1- on the upper bolt from
the Starter -B-.

– Remove the nut -4- and remove the wiring harness bracket
-2-.

3. Starter 33
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

cardiagn.com
Note

The wires remain connected.

– Remove the Starter -B- -1- bolts -3 and 5-.

– Remove the Starter -B- -1- downward.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Connect the Battery -A-. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and
Connecting”, page 15 ,
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -3.1 Starter”, page 32

34 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

4 Cruise Control System

Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep.
Gr. 27; Cruise Control System.

cardiagn.com

4. Cruise Control System 35

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

5 Start/Stop System
⇒ D5.1 escription - Start/Stop System”, page 36

5.1 General Description - Start/Stop Sys‐

tem
The Start/Stop System reduces fuel consumption by turning off
the engine when the vehicle is at a standstill and turning the
engine back on when the driver starts to drive. The Stop/Start
System activation occurs automatically. It occurs as soon as the
vehicle starts to drive for approximately 4 seconds at speeds of
at least 3 km/h.

cardiagn.com

36 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

6 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

⇒ L6.1 ocation Overview - Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)”,
page 37
⇒ M6.2 odule for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 38
⇒ C6.3 ruise Control (ACC), Calibrating”, page 38

6.1 Component Location Overview - Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

1 - Instrument Cluster -KX2-

❑ With Instrument Cluster
Control Module -J285-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
I1.2 nstrument Clus‐
terKX2, Removing and
Installing”, page 43 .
2 - Adaptive Cruise Control

cardiagn.com
Button -E357-
❑ Is integrated in the
multifunction steering
wheel.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Com‐
munication; Rep.
Gr. 91; Multifunction
Steering Wheel; Right
and Left Multifunction
Buttons on Steering
Wheel -E441-/-E440-,
Removing and Instal‐
ling.
3 - Connector
4 - Radiator Grille
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66;
Radiator Grille/Front
Trim; Radiator Grille,
Removing and Instal‐
ling.
5 - Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control -J428-
❑ Calibrating. Refer to ⇒ C6.3 ruise Control (ACC), Calibrating”, page 38 .
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ M6.2 odule for Adaptive Cruise Control, Removing and Installing”,
page 38 .
6 - VW Emblem
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66; Name Badges and Emblems; Front
Emblems, Removing and Installing.

6. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 37

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

6.2 Control Module for Adaptive Cruise

Control, Removing and Installing

Note

If the Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control -J428- is re‐

placed, start the respective function using the Vehicle Diagnos‐
tic Tester.

Removing
– Remove the VW emblem from the radiator grille. Refer to
⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66; Name Badges and Emblems;
Front Emblems, Removing and Installing.
– Release the tabs -2-.

cardiagn.com
– At the same time, pivot the Control Module for Adaptive
Cruise Control -J428- -1- out of the radiator grille in the
direction of -arrow-.
– Release and disconnect the connector -3-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– The Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control -J428- must
engage audibly and securely in the radiator grille.
– If necessary, calibrate the adaptive cruise control (ACC).
Refer to ⇒ C6.3 ruise Control (ACC), Calibrating”, page 38 .

6.3 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Cali‐

brating
Conditions
– The Control Module for Adaptive Cruise Control -J428- must
be calibrated under the following conditions:
♦ Distance Regulation Control Module -J428- was replaced.
♦ Lock carrier service position was performed
♦ Lock carrier was removed and installed
♦ Lock carrier was replaced
♦ Rear axle toe was adjusted

38 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Note

♦ Too great of a horizontal adjustment of the Distance Regu‐

lation Control Module -J428- causes the ACC/Front Assist
functions to remain switched off. This is indicated by the fol‐
lowing message in the Instrument Cluster -KX2-: ACC/Front
Assist not available .
♦ A limited sensor view due to a dirty sensor or inclement
weather conditions (for example, heavy rain, snowfall, iced
over sensor etc.) causes the ACC/Front Assist functions to
be temporarily unavailable. This is indicated by the following
message in the Instrument Cluster -KX2-: ACC/Front As-
sist: No sensor view .

– Calibrate the adaptive cruise control. Refer to ⇒ Suspension,

Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 44; Adaptive Cruise Control;
Adaptive Cruise Control, Calibrating.

cardiagn.com

6. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 39

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

7 Special Tools

Special tools and workshop

equipment required

cardiagn.com
♦ Multi-Tooth Adapter -3400-
♦ Torque Wrench, 40-200Nm -VAG1332A-
♦ Torx Key Socket Set -VAG1603A/1-

♦ Adapter -T10474-

40 Rep. Gr.27 - Battery, Starter, Generator, Cruise Control

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

♦ Torque Wrench, 6-50Nm -VAG1331A-

♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-

cardiagn.com
♦ Torque Wrench 1783 - 2-10Nm -VAG1783-

♦ Generator Belt Socket -3310-

7. Special Tools 41
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

90 – Instruments
1 Instrument Cluster
⇒ -1.1 Instrument Cluster”, page 42
⇒ I1.2 nstrument ClusterKX2, Removing and Installing”, page
43

1.1 Overview - Instrument Cluster

⇒ -1.1.1 Instrument Cluster, Instrument Cluster with Analog
Instruments”, page 42
⇒ -1.1.2 Instrument Cluster, Fully Digital Instrument Cluster”,
page 42

1.1.1 Overview - Instrument Cluster, Instrument Cluster with Analog Instru‐

ments

1 - Connector

cardiagn.com
2 - Instrument Cluster -KX2-
❑ With Instrument Cluster
Control Module -J285-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
I1.2.1 nstrument Clus‐
terKX2, Removing and
Installing, Instrument
Cluster with Analog In‐
struments”, page 43 .
3 - Instrument Cluster Trim
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Body
Interior; Rep. Gr. 70; In‐
strument Panel; Instru‐
ment Cluster Trim, Re‐
moving and Installing.
4 - Bolts
❑ 1.5 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
5 - Upper Steering Column
Trim Panel
❑ Removing and in‐
stalling. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 68; Storage Com‐
partments/Covers; Up‐
per Steering Column
Trim Panel, Removing
and Installing.

1.1.2 Overview - Instrument Cluster, Fully Digital Instrument Cluster

42 Rep. Gr.90 - Instruments

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Instrument Cluster -KX2-

❑ With Instrument Cluster
Control Module -J285-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
I1.2.2 nstrument Clus‐
terKX2, Removing and
Installing, All-Digital In‐
strument Cluster”, page
45 .
2 - Connector
❑ For the instrument clus‐
ter
3 - MOST Bus Connector
❑ For the instrument clus‐
ter
4 - Instrument Cluster Trim
Molding
❑ Removing and instal‐

cardiagn.com
ling. Refer to ⇒ Body
Interior; Rep. Gr. 70; In‐
strument Panel; Instru‐
ment Panel Decorative
Trim, Removing and In‐
stalling.
5 - Screw
❑ 1.5 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2

1.2 Instrument Cluster -KX2-, Removing

and Installing
⇒ I1.2.1 nstrument ClusterKX2, Removing and Installing, Instru‐
ment Cluster with Analog Instruments”, page 43
⇒ I1.2.2 nstrument ClusterKX2, Removing and Installing, All-
Digital Instrument Cluster”, page 45

1.2.1 Instrument Cluster -KX2-, Removing

and Installing, Instrument Cluster with
Analog Instruments
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-
♦ Vehicle Diagnostic Tester

1. Instrument Cluster 43
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Note

♦ All indicator lamps in the Instrument Cluster -KX2- have

LEDs. LEDs cannot be replaced separately if faulty. The
instrument cluster must be replaced.
♦ Do not disassemble the Instrument Cluster -KX2-.
♦ If the Instrument Cluster -KX2- is replaced with the Instru‐
ment Cluster Control Module -J285-, start the respective
function using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

General Description:
The following components are integrated in the Instrument
Cluster -KX2-:
♦ Instrument Cluster Control Module -J285-
♦ Fuel Gauge -G1-
♦ Speedometer -G21-
♦ Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge -G3-

cardiagn.com
♦ Tachometer -G5-
♦ Indicator lamps
Removing
– Position the steering wheel as far back and down as possi‐
ble. Use the entire adjustment range of the steering column
adjustment for this.
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent
switching on the ignition unintentionally.
– Remove the instrument cluster trim. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70; Instrument Panel; Instrument Cluster Trim, Re‐
moving and Installing.
– Remove the bolts -2-.

Note

The Instrument Cluster -KX2- is engaged in the instrument pan‐

el. A greater amount of force is necessary for removal.

44 Rep. Gr.90 - Instruments

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the Instrument Cluster - KX2- -1- until it contacts

the steering wheel.
– Disconnect the connector -5-.
– To disconnect the connector, press the catch -4-.
– Pivot the retaining bracket -3- and disconnect the connector
-5-.
– Remove the Instrument Cluster -KX2- on the front passen‐
ger side between the steering wheel and the instrument pan‐
el.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -1.1.1 Instrument Cluster, Instrument Cluster with
Analog Instruments”, page 42

1.2.2 Instrument Cluster -KX2-, Removing

and Installing, All-Digital Instrument
Cluster

cardiagn.com
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Hook -T10538-
♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-
♦ Fiber-Optic Repair Set - Connector Protective Caps -
VAS6223/9-.

Note

♦ Do not disassemble the Instrument Cluster -KX2-.

♦ It is not necessary to remove the steering wheel in order to
remove the Instrument Cluster -KX2-.
♦ If the Instrument Cluster - KX2- is replaced with the Instru‐
ment Cluster Control Module -J285-, select the “Replace”
function for the corresponding control module in “Guided
Fault Finding” or “Guided Functions” mode on the Vehicle
Diagnostic Tester.

Removing
– Position the steering wheel as far back and down as possi‐
ble. Use the entire adjustment range of the steering column
adjustment for this.
– Switch off the ignition.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent the
ignition from switching on unintentionally.
– Remove the instrument cluster trim. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70; Instrument Panel; Instrument Cluster Trim, Re‐
moving and Installing.
– Remove the screws -arrows-.

1. Instrument Cluster 45
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Place the -T10538- -2- as shown on the upper opening on

cardiagn.com
the Instrument Cluster -KX2- -1-.

Note

The Instrument Cluster -KX2- is engaged in the instrument pan‐

el. A greater amount of force is necessary for removal.

– Loosen the Instrument Cluster -KX2- -1- with the -T10538-

-2- from the instrument cluster catches.
– Remove the Instrument Cluster -KX2- -1- until the connec‐
tors are accessible.
– To disconnect the connector, press the catch -1-.

– Pivot the retaining bracket in the direction of -arrow- and

disconnect the connector.
– Release and disconnect the connector for the MOST bus.
– Insert the -VAS6223/9- -1- onto the MOST bus connector
-2-.

46 Rep. Gr.90 - Instruments

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the Instrument Cluster -KX2- between the steering

wheel and the instrument panel.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -1.1.2 Instrument Cluster, Fully Digital Instrument

cardiagn.com
Cluster”, page 42

1. Instrument Cluster 47
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

2 Horn
⇒ -2.1 Horn”, page 48
⇒ H2.2 igh Tone HornH2/Low Tone HornH7, Removing and
Installing”, page 50

2.1 Overview - Horn

⇒ -2.1.1 Horn, Version 1”, page 48
⇒ -2.1.2 Horn, Version 2”, page 48
⇒ -2.1.3 Horn, Version 3”, page 49

2.1.1 Overview - Horn, Version 1

1 - Connector
2 - High Tone Horn -H2-
❑ Installed on the right
side
❑ Removing and instal‐

cardiagn.com
ling. Refer to ⇒
H2.2.1 igh Tone
HornH2/Low Tone
HornH7, Removing and
Installing, Version 1”,
page 50 .
3 - Nut
❑ 18 Nm
4 - Low Tone Horn -H7-
❑ Installed on the left side
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
H2.2.1 igh Tone
HornH2/Low Tone
HornH7, Removing and
Installing, Version 1”,
page 50 .
5 - Nut
❑ 11 Nm
6 - Bracket
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
H2.2.1 igh Tone
HornH2/Low Tone
HornH7, Removing and
Installing, Version 1”,
page 50 .

2.1.2 Overview - Horn, Version 2

48 Rep. Gr.90 - Instruments

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Horn
❑ High Tone Horn -H2- is
installed on the left
❑ Low Tone Horn -H7- in
installed on the right
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
H2.2.2 igh Tone
HornH2/Low Tone
HornH7, Removing and
Installing, Version 2”,
page 51 .
2 - Connector
3 - Bracket
❑ For the High Tone Horn
-H2- / Low Tone Horn
-H7-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
H2.2.2 igh Tone

cardiagn.com
HornH2/Low Tone
HornH7, Removing and
Installing, Version 2”,
page 51 .
4 - Screw
❑ 18 Nm
5 - Nut
❑ 11 Nm

2.1.3 Overview - Horn, Version 3

2. Horn 49
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Left Horn -H33-

❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
L2.2.3 eft HornH33,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 52 .
2 - Connector
❑ Quantity: 1
3 - Screw
❑ Tightening specifica‐
tion: 8 Nm
❑ Quantity: 1
4 - Bracket

cardiagn.com
2.2 High Tone Horn -H2-/Low Tone Horn
-H7-, Removing and Installing
⇒ H2.2.1 igh Tone HornH2/Low Tone HornH7, Removing and
Installing, Version 1”, page 50
⇒ H2.2.2 igh Tone HornH2/Low Tone HornH7, Removing and
Installing, Version 2”, page 51

2.2.1 High Tone Horn -H2-/Low Tone Horn

-H7-, Removing and Installing, Version
1
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench, 6-50Nm -VAG1331A-

Note

The removal and instillation for the left horn is described. The
removal and installation of the right horn is similar.

Removing
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63; Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing.
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.

50 Rep. Gr.90 - Instruments

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the nut -3-.

– Remove the horn -1- from the bracket -4-.
– Remove the nut -5-.
– Remove the bracket -4-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

cardiagn.com
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -2.1.1 Horn, Version 1”, page 48

2.2.2 High Tone Horn -H2-/Low Tone Horn

-H7-, Removing and Installing, Version
2
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench, 6-50Nm -VAG1331A-

Note

The removal and installation is described for the right side. The
removal and installation on the left side is similar.

Removing
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63; Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing.
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.

2. Horn 51
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the nut -5-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the horn -1- from the bracket -3-.
– Remove the bolt -4-.
– Remove the bracket -3-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -2.1.2 Horn, Version 2”, page 48

2.2.3 Left Horn -H33-, Removing and Instal‐

ling
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-

Note

♦ The Left Horn -H33- is activated from the Vehicle Electrical

System Control Module -J519-.
♦ The horns can be checked via the output diagnostic test
mode of the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module -
J519-.
♦ Horn tightening specification: 11 Nm.

Caution

♦ Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.

♦ Remove the ignition key if equipped.

Removing
– Remove the radiator grille. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 66; Radiator Grille/Front Trim; Radiator Grille, Removing
and Installing.

52 Rep. Gr.90 - Instruments

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the bolt -3-.

– Remove the Left Horn -H33- -1-.

– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing

cardiagn.com
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -2.1.3 Horn, Version 3”, page 49

2. Horn 53
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

3 Special Tools
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Hook -T10538-

♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-

cardiagn.com
♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-

♦ Fiber-Optic Repair Set - Connector Protective Caps -

VAS6223/9-.

54 Rep. Gr.90 - Instruments

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

92 – Wiper/Washer Systems
1 Windshield Wiper System
⇒ -1.1 Windshield Wiper System”, page 55
⇒ W1.2 iper, Bringing into Service Position”, page 57
⇒ B1.3 lade, Removing and Installing”, page 58
⇒ W1.4 iper Arms, Removing and Installing”, page 59
⇒ W1.5 iper Arms, Adjusting”, page 60
⇒ W1.6 indshield Wiper MotorV, Removing and Installing”, page
62
⇒ W1.7 iper Motor, Deactivating Alternating Park Position Func‐
tion”, page 63
⇒ R1.8 ecognition Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 64

1.1 Overview - Windshield Wiper System

cardiagn.com

1. Windshield Wiper System 55

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Front Passenger Side

Wiper Blade
❑ There are different
lengths. Refer to the
Parts Catalog.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
B1.3 lade, Removing
and Installing”, page
58 .
2 - Driver Side Wiper Blade
❑ There are different
lengths. Refer to the
Parts Catalog.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
B1.3 lade, Removing
and Installing”, page
58 .
3 - Front Passenger Side

cardiagn.com
Windshield Wiper Arm
❑ There are different
lengths. Refer to the
Parts Catalog.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
W1.4 iper Arms, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 59 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to ⇒
W1.5 iper Arms, Adjust‐
ing”, page 60 .
4 - Cap
5 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
6 - Driver Side Windshield Wiper Arm
❑ There are different lengths. Refer to the Parts Catalog.
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ W1.4 iper Arms, Removing and Installing”, page 59 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ W1.5 iper Arms, Adjusting”, page 60 .
7 - Cap
8 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
9 - Screw
❑ Tightening specification and sequence. Refer to ⇒ Fig. ““Windshield Wiper Frame - Tightening Specifi‐
cation and Sequence”“, page 57 .
10 - Screw
❑ Tightening specification and sequence. Refer to ⇒ Fig. ““Windshield Wiper Frame - Tightening Specifi‐
cation and Sequence”“, page 57 .
11 - Windshield Wiper Frame
❑ With Windshield Wiper Motor -V-
❑ With the Wiper Motor Control Module -J400-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ W1.6 indshield Wiper MotorV, Removing and Installing”, page
62 .
12 - Screw

56 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020
❑ Tightening specification and sequence. Refer to ⇒ Fig. ““Windshield Wiper Frame - Tightening Specifi‐
cation and Sequence”“, page 57 .

Windshield Wiper Frame - Tightening Specification and Se‐

quence

– Tighten the bolts for the windshield wiper frame -4- in steps
in the sequence shown.

cardiagn.com
Step Bolts Tightening Specification
1. -1 through 3- Install by hand all the way
2. -1 through 3- 8 Nm

1.2 Windshield Wiper, Bringing into Serv‐

ice Position

Caution

Risk of damaging the front lid by moving the windshield wip‐

ers back to the basic setting.
♦ Do not drive a vehicle with windshield wiper arms folded
up.
♦ The windshield wipers automatically retract to their rest
position when the windshield wiper switch is activated or
when driving faster than 6 km/h.

Caution

Risk of damaging the wiper blades due to freezing.

♦ If frost is present, check to see if the wiper blades are
frozen.

Note

If the windshield wiper motor is to be run during the procedure,

the front lid must be completely closed, otherwise the power
supply to the wiper motor will be interrupted.

– Briefly turn the ignition on and then off again.

– Operate the windshield wiper switch in the “one-touch wip‐
ing” position.

1. Windshield Wiper System 57

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

• The windshield wipers run in the “service position”.

1.3 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing

Removing
– Bring the windshield wiper into the service position. Refer to
⇒ W1.2 iper, Bringing into Service Position”, page 57 .

Caution

Risk of damaging the wiper blade.

♦ Joint-free windshield wipers are very flexible. Only grasp
the wiper blades in the wiper blade mount area to lift
them away from the windshield.

– Lift the windshield wiper arm off the windshield.

– Press the clip in direction of -arrow A- and slide the wiper
blade -1- off of the windshield wiper arm -2- in direction of
-arrow B-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the wiper blade -1-.
Installing

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the body.

♦ The driver and front passenger side wiper blades are
different lengths.

Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

– Guide the wiper blade -1- parallel into the windshield wiper
arm -2- in direction of -arrow-. Make sure that the wiper
blade -1- is slid into the windshield wiper arm -2- until the
clip audibly engages.

58 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

To leave the “service position”:

– Operate the windshield wiper switch. or
– Drive the vehicle faster than 6 km/h.

1.4 Windshield Wiper Arms, Removing and

Installing

cardiagn.com
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Puller - Wiper Arm Kit -T10369-
♦ Torque Wrench, 6-50Nm -VAG1331A-
Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the wiper arm shafts.

♦ The wiper arm shafts can get damaged when removing
the windshield wiper arms without using the -T10369/1-.

Note

If the windshield wiper motor is to be run during the work proce‐

dure, the front lid must be closed. Otherwise, the power supply
to the wiper motor will be interrupted.

– Bring the windshield wiper into the service position. Refer to

⇒ W1.2 iper, Bringing into Service Position”, page 57 .
– Pry the caps -3- off the windshield wiper arms -1- with a
screwdriver.

1. Windshield Wiper System 59

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Loosen the nuts -2- several turns.

cardiagn.com
– Position the -T10369/1- on the windshield wiper arm -1- as
shown.

– Position the thrust piece -2- on the wiper arm shaft.

– Turn the bolt -3- clockwise until the windshield wiper arm -1-
is removed from the wiper arm shaft.
– Remove the nut completely and remove the windshield wip‐
er arm -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the body.

♦ The windshield wiper arms on the driver and front pas‐
senger sides are different lengths.

– Adjust the windshield wiper arms. Refer to ⇒ W1.5 iper

Arms, Adjusting”, page 60 .

1.5 Windshield Wiper Arms, Adjusting

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench, 6-50Nm -VAG1331A-

60 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Note

If the windshield wiper motor is to be run during the work proce‐

dure, the front lid must be closed. Otherwise, the power supply
to the wiper motor will be interrupted.

– Deactivate the APP function. Refer to ⇒ W1.7 iper Motor,

Deactivating Alternating Park Position Function”, page 63 .
– Remove the windshield wiper arms. Refer to ⇒ W1.4 iper
Arms, Removing and Installing”, page 59 .
– Switch the ignition on.
– Activate “one-touch wiping” and let the windshield wiper mo‐
tor run into its end position.
– Switch off the ignition.
– Position the windshield wiper arm with wiper blade installed
on the wiper arm shaft.

cardiagn.com
Note

The adjustment dimension for the wiper blade park position

-a- is measured and adjusted between the center of the wiper
blade -1- and the upper edge of the plenum chamber cover -2-.

– Align the wiper blade as follows on the windshield:

Note

Adjust the distance -a- between the center wiper blade -1- and
the upper edge of the plenum chamber cover -2-.

1. Windshield Wiper System 61

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

♦ Dimension -a- = 35 + 10 mm.

– Tighten the nuts -2- for the windshield wiper arms -1-.

cardiagn.com
– Switch the ignition on.
– Activate “one-touch wiping” and let the windshield wiper
arms run into their end position.
– Switch off the ignition.
– Check the wiper arm adjustment one more time and adjust if
necessary.
– Press the caps -3- onto the windshield wiper arms.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -1.1 Windshield Wiper System”, page 55

1.6 Windshield Wiper Motor -V-, Removing

and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-

Note

If the Windshield Wiper Motor -V- with the Wiper Motor Control
Module -J400- is being replaced, start the respective function
using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

Removing
– Remove the windshield wiper arms. Refer to ⇒ W1.4 iper
Arms, Removing and Installing”, page 59 .
– Remove the left plenum chamber cover. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 50; Bulkhead; Plenum Chamber Cover,
Removing and Installing.
– If equipped, release and disconnect the connector for the
windshield defogger.
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.

62 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the wiring harness from the windshield wiper frame

-1-.
– Remove the screws -3-.
– Guide out the windshield wiper frame -1- with linkage and
windshield wiper motor from the plenum chamber.
Installing

cardiagn.com
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Adjust the windshield wiper arms. Refer to ⇒ W1.5 iper
Arms, Adjusting”, page 60 .
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ Fig. ““Windshield Wiper Frame - Tightening Spec‐
ification and Sequence”“, page 57

1.7 Windshield Wiper Motor, Deactivating

Alternating Park Position Function
Windshield wiper system is equipped with APP function (alter‐
nating park position).
The APP function causes the wiper at every second wiper shut
off to move upward slightly after reaching the lowest position.
To install the motor crank on the windshield wiper motor, it is
necessary to shut off the motor in the lowest park position. APP
function must be deactivated to ensure this.

Note

♦ An activation of APP function is not possible.

♦ APP function is automatically activated after 100 wiping cy‐
cles. This applies to wiper motors in which the APP function
was deactivated as well as for new wiper motors.

– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester. Refer to ⇒ D7 iag‐

nostic Tester”, page 253 .
– Deactivate the wiper motor APP function. Refer to Vehicle
Diagnostic Tester.

Note

After successfully completing coding / deactivating of the APP

function, the windshield wiper motor is located in the lower park
position after the next wiper cycle.

1. Windshield Wiper System 63

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1.8 Rain/Light Recognition Sensor, Re‐

moving and Installing

Note

♦ The Rain/Light Recognition Sensor -G397- has a silicone

layer as a contact surface to the windshield.
♦ The Rain/Light Recognition Sensor -G397- cannot be option‐
ally replaced. Refer to the Parts Catalog for the correct Rain/
Light Recognition Sensor -G397- based on the part number.
♦ If the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor -G397- is replaced by
another Rain/Light Recognition Sensor -G397- with a differ‐
ent part number, access the respective function with the
Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent

cardiagn.com
switching on the ignition unintentionally.
– Remove the interior rearview mirror. Refer to ⇒ Body Interi‐
or; Rep. Gr. 68; Interior Rearview Mirror; Interior Rearview
Mirror, Removing and Installing.
– Release and disconnect the connector -3-.

– Insert a narrow screwdriver -5- into the opening as shown

and release the retainers on the spring -2- in direction of
-arrows-.
– Wait one minute so that the silicone pad can be removed
without leaving any residue.
– Loosen the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor -G397- -4- by
moving it back and forth and remove it from the mount -1-.

64 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the humidity sensor.

♦ The humidity sensor -arrow- on the Rain/Light Recogni‐
tion Sensor -G397- -1- is extremely sensitive and must
not be damaged.

cardiagn.com
♦ If the humidity sensor -arrow- is replaced, the Rain/Light
Recognition Sensor -G397- -1- must be replaced.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
• Thoroughly clean the windshield surface inside the frame for
the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor -G397- before installing.
Remove any traces of the connecting pad that may still be
on the windshield.
– Thoroughly clean the windshield in the baseplate with clean‐
ing solution. Refer to Parts Catalog.
When Installing a New Rain/Light Recognition Sensor

– Gently press the grip surfaces -arrows- on the protective cap

-2- together and remove from the sensor -1-.

1. Windshield Wiper System 65

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Note

To avoid contaminating the connecting pad, remove the protec‐

tive cap just before installing it.

When Installing a Previously Installed Rain/Light Recognition

Sensor

cardiagn.com
– Remove the connecting pad -2- in the direction of -arrow-
without leaving any residue on the sensor -1-.
• The surface on the sensor must be completely free of any
remaining connecting pad.
– Clean the adhesive surface on the sensor -1- with a lint-free
towel.
– Remove the silicone paper -1- from the connecting pad -3-.

– The clear protective film -2- remains on the connecting pad

as an assembly aid.
– Place the connecting pad -2- centered on the Rain/Light
Recognition Sensor -G397- -3- using the transparent protec‐
tive film -1-.

66 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Press the connecting pad -2- through the protective film -1-
free of bubbles on the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor -G397-
-3-.
– Remove the protective film -2- from the connecting pad -1-.

cardiagn.com
Note

To avoid contaminating the connecting pad, remove the protec‐

tive film just before installing it.

Continuation for All Versions

– Insert the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor -G397- -4- into the

mount -2-.

1. Windshield Wiper System 67

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

• The Rain/Light Recognition Sensor -G397- -4- must not

have any embedded objects or bubbles between it and the
windshield so that it functions correctly.
– Press on the clips -1 and 5- until they audibly engage.
– Connect the connector -3-.
– Read out the DTC memory and delete the sporadic faults
using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.
– If the Rain/Light Recognition Sensor -G397- was replaced, it
must be coded using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

cardiagn.com

68 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

2 Windshield Washer System

⇒ -2.1 Windshield Washer System”, page 69
⇒ F2.2 luid Reservoir, Removing and Installing”, page 71
⇒ W2.3 asher Fluid Level Sensor, Removing and Installing”,
page 73
⇒ W2.4 asher Pump, Removing and Installing”, page 73
⇒ N2.5 ozzles, Removing and Installing”, page 74
⇒ N2.6 ozzles, Adjusting”, page 75

2.1 Overview - Windshield Washer System

Note

Depending on the equipment the washer fluid reservoir varies in shape and size from the illustration.

cardiagn.com

2. Windshield Washer System 69

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Connector
❑ For the Right Washer
Nozzle Heater -Z21-
2 - Right Washer Nozzle
❑ Versions with Right
Washer Nozzle Heater
-Z21-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
N2.5 ozzles, Removing
and Installing”, page
74 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to ⇒
N2.6 ozzles, Adjusting”,
page 75 .
3 - Washer Fluid Hose Con‐
nection
4 - Washer Fluid Hose
❑ For the windshield

cardiagn.com
washer system
❑ Black color coding
5 - Connector
❑ For the Left Washer
Nozzle Heater -Z20-
6 - Left Washer Nozzle
❑ Versions with Left
Washer Nozzle Heater
-Z20-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
N2.5 ozzles, Removing
and Installing”, page
74 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to ⇒
N2.6 ozzles, Adjusting”, page 75 .
7 - Washer Fluid Hose Connection
8 - Grommet
❑ For the washer fluid hose in the front lid
9 - Connector
❑ For the Windshield And Rear Window Washer Pump -V59-
10 - Washer Fluid Hose Connection
11 - Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump -V59-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ W2.4 asher Pump, Removing and Installing”, page 73 .
12 - Grommet
❑ Replace if damaged
13 - Nuts
❑ 8 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
14 - Washer Fluid Reservoir
❑ With Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor -G33-.
❑ Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ F2.2 luid Reservoir, Removing and
Installing”, page 71 .

70 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020
❑ Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor -G33-, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ W2.3 asher Fluid
Level Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 73 .
15 - Filler Tube
❑ For the washer fluid reservoir
16 - Filler Neck
❑ For the washer fluid reservoir
17 - Screen
18 - Cap
❑ For the filler neck

2.2 Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing

and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-
♦ Drip Tray

cardiagn.com
Note

Depending on the equipment the washer fluid reservoir varies

in shape and size from the illustration shown. The removal and
installation is the same for all versions.

Removing
– Remove the left front wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66; Wheel Housing Liner; Front Wheel
Housing Liner, Removing and Installing.
– Place a drip tray under the washer fluid reservoir.
– Release the locking tab -3-.

Caution

Risk of leaks.
♦ The washer fluid reservoir is one part. The washer fluid
reservoir, filler tube and filler neck are not designed to
be separated. However, if the components are separa‐
ted, the connection can leak.

– Remove the filler neck -1- upward from the lock carrier hold‐
er -2-.

2. Windshield Washer System 71

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release and disconnect the connectors -1 and 5-.

– Release and remove the washer fluid hose -3 and 4- from

the Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump -V59- -2-.
– Remove the connectors -6- with the corresponding bracket

cardiagn.com
from the washer fluid reservoir.
– Remove the bracket -arrow- for the wiring harnesses from
the washer fluid reservoir.
– Remove the nuts -2-.

– Pull the washer fluid reservoir -1- off the threaded pins and
remove.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

In order to prevent interchanging the washer fluid hoses at the

Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump -V59-, the connec‐
tions on the pump and hose lines are marked with colors. Hose
connector pieces must be connected to the corresponding col‐
ored pump connections during installation.

Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -2.1 Windshield Washer System”, page 69

72 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

2.3 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sen‐

sor, Removing and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Drip Tray

Note

Depending on the equipment the washer fluid reservoir varies

in shape and size from the illustration shown. The removal and
installation for the windshield washer fluid level sensor is the
same for all versions.

Removing
– Remove the left front wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66; Wheel Housing Liner; Front Wheel
Housing Liner, Removing and Installing.
– Place a drip tray under the washer fluid reservoir.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the Windshield Washer Fluid Level Sensor -G33-
-1- from the washer fluid reservoir.
– If necessary, remove the seal -3- from the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Install the seal correctly in the opening in the washer fluid
reservoir.
– Coat the seal with washer fluid, so that the Windshield
Washer Fluid Level Sensor -G33- can be easily pushed in.

2.4 Windshield Washer Pump, Removing

and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Drip Tray

2. Windshield Washer System 73

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Note

Depending on the equipment the washer fluid reservoir varies

in shape and size from the illustration shown. The removal and
installation for the windshield washer pump is the same for all
versions.

Removing
– Remove the left front wheel housing liner. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66; Wheel Housing Liner; Front Wheel
Housing Liner, Removing and Installing.
– Release and disconnect the connector -1-.

cardiagn.com
– Release and remove the washer fluid hose -3 and 4- from
the Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump -V59- -2-.
– Remove the Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump
-V59- -2- from the washer fluid reservoir.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

In order to prevent interchanging the washer fluid hoses at the

Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump -V59-, the connec‐
tions on the pump and hose lines are marked with colors. Hose
connector pieces must be connected to the corresponding col‐
ored pump connections during installation.

– Check the grommet for the Windshield and Rear Window

Washer Pump -V59- on the washer fluid reservoir for dam‐
age and correct seating.

2.5 Washer Nozzles, Removing and Instal‐

ling
Removing
– Open the hood.
– Push the washer nozzle upward in direction of -arrow A- and
tilt it out from under the flap in direction of -arrow B-.

74 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release the hose clip -1- in the direction of -arrow-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the hose connection -2- from the washer nozzle -3-.
– Release and disconnect the connector -4-.
– Remove the washer nozzle -3-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

When connecting the washer fluid hose, make sure that the clip
engages audibly into the connection.

– Starting at the top, slide the washer nozzle into the installa‐
tion opening until it engages audibly.
– Adjust the washer nozzles. Refer to ⇒ N2.6 ozzles, Adjust‐
ing”, page 75 .

2.6 Washer Nozzles, Adjusting

Caution

There is a risk of damage.

♦ Do not use any objects to clean the washer nozzles!

2. Windshield Washer System 75

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Note

Remove the washer nozzle if the spraying field is uneven due

to dirt in the nozzle, and flush it out with water in the opposite
direction of the spray. It is then permitted to blow compressed
air opposite the spray direction. Do not use any objects to clean
the washer nozzles!

– Adjust the windshield washer system washer nozzles. Refer

to ⇒ Maintenance; Booklet 42.1; Procedure Description.

cardiagn.com

76 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

3 Rear Window Wiper System

⇒ -3.1 Rear Window Wiper System”, page 77
⇒ B3.2 lade, Removing and Installing”, page 78
⇒ A3.3 rm, Removing and Installing”, page 78
⇒ A3.4 rm, Adjusting”, page 79
⇒ R3.5 ear Window Wiper MotorV12, Removing and Installing”,
page 80

3.1 Overview - Rear Window Wiper System

1 - Cap
2 - Nut
❑ 12 Nm
3 - Windshield Wiper Arm with
Joint-Free Windshield Wiper
❑ Removing and instal‐

cardiagn.com
ling. Refer to ⇒
A3.3 rm, Removing and
Installing”, page 78 .
❑ Park Position, Adjust‐
ing. Refer to ⇒ A3.4 rm,
Adjusting”, page 79 .
❑ Joint-Free Windshield
Wiper, Removing and
installing. Refer to ⇒
B3.2 lade, Removing
and Installing”, page
78 .
4 - Seal
❑ Integrated in the rear
window
❑ Replace if damaged.
Refer to ⇒ R3.5 ear
Window Wiper Mo‐
torV12, Removing and
Installing”, page 80 .
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
R3.5 ear Window Wip‐
er MotorV12, Removing
and Installing”, page
80 .
5 - Rear Window Wiper Motor
-V12-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ R3.5 ear Window Wiper MotorV12, Removing and Installing”, page 80 .
6 - Nuts
❑ 8 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
7 - Rubber Rings
❑ Quantity: 3
8 - Spacers
❑ Quantity: 3

3. Rear Window Wiper System 77

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

3.2 Wiper Blade, Removing and Installing

Caution

Risk of damaging the wiper blade.

♦ Joint-free windshield wipers are very flexible. Only grasp
the wiper blades in the wiper blade mount area to lift
them away from the windshield.

Removing
– Remove the wiper arm from the rear window.
– Pivot the wiper blade out of the windshield wiper arm in the
direction of -arrow A-.

cardiagn.com
– Push the release button -2-.
– Remove the wiper blade on the wiper blade mount -1- in the
direction of -arrow B- from the windshield wiper arm.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

The wiper blade must audibly engage in the wiper arm.

3.3 Wiper Arm, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Puller - Wiper Arm Kit -T10369-
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-
Removing
– Switch the ignition on.
– Activate “rear wiping” and let the wiper arm run to end posi‐
tion.
– Switch off the ignition.
– Push the rear window wiper cap -1- together in the direction
of -arrow A-.

78 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Fold up the cap in the direction of -arrow B-.

– Loosen the nut -3- several turns.

cardiagn.com
– Position the -T10369/5- on the wiper arm -2-.
– Position the thrust piece -4- on the wiper arm shaft.
– Turn the bolt -1- clockwise until the windshield wiper arm is
removed from the wiper arm shaft.
– Completely remove the nut -3-.
– Remove the windshield wiper arm -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Adjust the wiper arm. Refer to ⇒ A3.4 rm, Adjusting”, page
79 .

3.4 Wiper Arm, Adjusting

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-
Procedure
– Remove the wiper arm. Refer to ⇒ A3.3 rm, Removing and
Installing”, page 78 .
– Switch the ignition on.
– Activate “rear wiping” and let the wiper arm shaft run to end
position.
– Switch off the ignition.
– Position the wiper arm -1- with wiper blade installed at the
wiper arm shaft.

3. Rear Window Wiper System 79

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Align the wiper blade on the rear window as follows.

Note

cardiagn.com
The dimension is the distance between the wiper blade tip and
the lower edge of the window.

♦ Dimension -a- = 34 ± 5 mm.

– Tighten the wiper arm nut.
– Switch the ignition on.
– Activate “rear wiping” and let the wiper arm run to end posi‐
tion.
– Check the wiper arm adjustment again and correct if neces‐
sary.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -3.1 Rear Window Wiper System”, page 77

3.5 Rear Window Wiper Motor -V12-, Re‐

moving and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-
Removing
– Remove the wiper arm. Refer to ⇒ A3.3 rm, Removing and
Installing”, page 78 .
– Remove the rear lid lower trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interi‐
or; Rep. Gr. 70; Luggage Compartment Trim Panels; Rear
Lid Lower Trim Panel, Removing and Installing.
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.

80 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the nuts -3-.

– Remove the Rear Window Wiper Motor -V12- -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– If necessary, coat the inside of the seal in the rear window
with a rubber- and plastic-compatible lubricant (such as poly‐

cardiagn.com
ethylene glycol).
– Make sure the seal fits correctly in the rear window opening.
The seal marking -1- must align with the marking -2- on the
rear window.

– Adjust the wiper arm. Refer to ⇒ A3.4 rm, Adjusting”, page

79 .
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -3.1 Rear Window Wiper System”, page 77

3. Rear Window Wiper System 81

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

4 Rear Window Washer System

⇒ -4.1 Rear Window Washer System”, page 82
⇒ F4.2 luid Reservoir, Removing and Installing”, page 83
⇒ W4.3 indow Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”, page
83
⇒ N4.4 ozzle, Removing and Installing”, page 83
⇒ N4.5 ozzle, Adjusting”, page 84

4.1 Overview - Rear Window Washer System

1 - High-Mounted Brake Lamp

❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
B5.2 rake Lamp, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 107 .
2 - Washer Fluid Hose Con‐

cardiagn.com
nection
❑ For the rear window
washer system
3 - Washer Nozzle
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
N4.4 ozzle, Removing
and Installing”, page
83 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to ⇒
N4.5 ozzle, Adjusting”,
page 84 .
4 - Washer Fluid Hose
❑ From the washer noz‐
zle of the rear window
washer system to the
coupling rod in the left
front footwell
5 - Washer Fluid Hose Cou‐
pling Rod
❑ In the left front footwell
near the Coupling Point
on Left A-Pillar, Bottom
-TALU-
6 - Washer Fluid Hose
❑ From the coupling rod in the left front footwell to the Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump
-V59- on the washer fluid reservoir
7 - Windshield and Rear Window Washer Pump -V59-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ W4.3 indow Washer Pump, Removing and Installing”, page 83 .
❑ With grommet; replace if damaged.
8 - Washer Fluid Reservoir
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ F4.2 luid Reservoir, Removing and Installing”, page 83 .

82 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

4.2 Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing

and Installing

Note

The combined washer fluid reservoir for the windshield and

rear window washer systems is located in the left front wheel
housing.

– Washer Fluid Reservoir, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒

F2.2 luid Reservoir, Removing and Installing”, page 71 .

4.3 Rear Window Washer Pump, Remov‐

ing and Installing

Note

The washer pump for the windshield and the rear window wash‐
er system is located inside in the left front wheel housing.

cardiagn.com
– Removing and installing the Windshield And Rear Window
Washer Pump -V59-. Refer to ⇒ W2.4 asher Pump, Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page 73 .

4.4 Washer Nozzle, Removing and Instal‐

ling

Note

The washer nozzle is installed in the high-mounted brake lamp.

Removing
– Remove the high-mounted brake lamp. Refer to ⇒ B5.2 rake
Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 107 .
– Release both catches in direction of -arrows-.

– Remove the washer nozzle -1- toward the rear from the
high-mounted brake lamp.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

4. Rear Window Washer System 83

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Note

When connecting the washer fluid hose, make sure that the clip
engages audibly into the connection.

– Adjust the washer nozzle. Refer to ⇒ N4.5 ozzle, Adjusting”,

page 84 .

4.5 Washer Nozzle, Adjusting

– Adjust the rear window washer system washer nozzles. Re‐
fer to ⇒ Maintenance; Booklet 42.1; Procedure Descriptions.

cardiagn.com

84 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

5 Washer Fluid Hoses

⇒ F5.1 luid Hoses, Servicing”, page 85

5.1 Washer Fluid Hoses, Servicing

All instructions and information on this chapter. Refer to ⇒ Elec‐
trical Equipment General Information; Rep. Gr. 92; Hose Re‐
pair.

cardiagn.com

5. Washer Fluid Hoses 85

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

6 Special Tools
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Puller - Wiper Arm Kit -T10369-

♦ Torque Wrench, 6-50Nm -VAG1331A-

cardiagn.com
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-

86 Rep. Gr.92 - Wiper/Washer Systems

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

94 – Exterior Lights, Switches

1 Headlamps
⇒ -1.1 Headlamps”, page 87
⇒ R1.2 emoving and Installing”, page 89
⇒ A1.3 djusting”, page 89
⇒ I1.4 nstallation Position, Correcting”, page 89
⇒ L1.5 eft Front Turn Signal BulbM5/Right Front Turn Signal
BulbM7, Removing and Installing”, page 90
⇒ B1.6 eam Headlamp Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page
91
⇒ L1.7 eft High Beam Headlamp BulbM30/Right High Beam
Headlamp BulbM32, Removing and Installing”, page 91
⇒ L1.8 eft Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp LED
ModuleL176/Right Daytime Running Lamp and Position Lamp
LED ModuleL177 L177, Removing and Installing”, page 91

cardiagn.com
⇒ L1.9 eft Cornering Lamp BulbL148/Right Cornering Lamp
BulbL149, Removing and Installing”, page 91
⇒ R1.10 ight LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1A27/Left
LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1A31, Removing and
Installing”, page 91
⇒ S1.11 ignal Control Module, Removing and Installing”, page
93

1.1 Overview - Headlamps

1. Headlamps 87
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Support
2 - Screw
❑ 4 Nm
3 - Screw
❑ 4 Nm
4 - Banjo Bolt
❑ For the headlamp
height adjustment
5 - Lifter
6 - Headlamp Beam Adjust‐
ment Motor
❑ Left Headlamp Range
Control Adjustment Mo‐
tor -V48-
❑ Right Headlamp Range
Control Adjustment Mo‐
tor -V49-

cardiagn.com
❑ No replacement part
7 - Housing Cover
❑ For the turn signal con‐
trol module
❑ Use if a repair is re‐
quired
8 - Screw
❑ 1.5 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
9 - Left/Right Turn Signal Control Module
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ S1.11 ignal Control Module, Removing and Installing”, page 93 .
10 - Spring Nut
11 - Screw
❑ 4 Nm
12 - Screw
❑ 1.5 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
13 - Screw
❑ 1.5 Nm
❑ Quantity: 4
14 - LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1
❑ Right LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1 -A27-
❑ Left LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1 -A31-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ R1.10 ight LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1A27/Left LED
Headlamp Power Output Module 1A31, Removing and Installing”, page 91 .
15 - Headlamps
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ R1.2 emoving and Installing”, page 89 .
❑ Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ A1.3 djusting”, page 89 .
16 - Banjo Bolt
❑ For the headlamp height adjustment
17 - Screw

88 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020
❑ 4 Nm
18 - Banjo Bolt
❑ For the headlamp height adjustment
19 - Screw
❑ 4 Nm

1.2 Headlamp, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-
Removing
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63; Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing.
– Remove the bolts -2, 3, 4 and 5-.

cardiagn.com
– Release and disconnect the connector on the headlamp -1-.
– Guide out the headlamp -1- forward.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Uniformly adjust the headlamp gap distribution. Refer to ⇒
I1.4 nstallation Position, Correcting”, page 89 .
– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp
if necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance; Booklet 42.1; Proce‐
dure Descriptions.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -1.1 Headlamps”, page 87

1.3 Headlamp, Adjusting

Headlamp, Adjusting. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance; Booklet 42.1;
Procedure Descriptions.

1.4 Headlamp Installation Position, Cor‐

recting
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-

1. Headlamps 89
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Procedure
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63; Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing.
– Loosen the bolts -2, 3, 4 and 5-.

cardiagn.com
– Uniformly adjust the gap distribution of the headlamp -1- to
the fender.
– Tighten the bolts -4 and 5-.
– Close the hood.
– Uniformly adjust the gap distribution of the banjo bolt for the
bolt -2-.
– Open the hood.
– Tighten the bolt -2- in the banjo bolt.
– Tighten the bolt -3-.
– Perform a function test.
– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp
if necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance; Booklet 42.1; Proce‐
dure Descriptions.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -1.1 Headlamps”, page 87

1.5 Left Front Turn Signal Bulb -M5-/Right

Front Turn Signal Bulb -M7-, Removing
and Installing

Note

The front turn signal bulbs are LEDs and are integrated in the
headlamp. Replacing the LEDs is not possible. The entire head‐
lamp must be replaced.

– Headlamps, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ R1.2 emov‐

ing and Installing”, page 89 .

90 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1.6 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb, Removing

and Installing

Note

The low beam headlamp bulb are LED lamps and are integra‐
ted in the headlamp. Changing the LED module is not possible.
The entire headlamp must be replaced.

– Headlamps, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ R1.2 emov‐

ing and Installing”, page 89 .

1.7 Left High Beam Headlamp Bulb -M30-/

Right High Beam Headlamp Bulb -
M32-, Removing and Installing

Note

The high beam headlamp bulb are LED lamps and are integra‐

cardiagn.com
ted in the headlamp. Changing the LED module is not possible.
The entire headlamp must be replaced.

– Headlamps, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ R1.2 emov‐

ing and Installing”, page 89 .

1.8 Left Daytime Running Lamp and Posi‐

tion Lamp LED Module -L176-/Right
Daytime Running Lamp and Position
Lamp LED Module -L177- -L177-, Re‐
moving and Installing

Note

The daytime running lamp LED module and position lamp are
integrated in the headlamps. Changing the LED module is not
possible. The entire headlamp must be replaced.

– Headlamps, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ R1.2 emov‐

ing and Installing”, page 89 .

1.9 Left Cornering Lamp Bulb -L148-/Right

Cornering Lamp Bulb -L149-, Remov‐
ing and Installing

Note

The Left Cornering Lamp Bulb -L148-/Right Cornering Lamp

Bulb -L149- and the Left Front Fog Lamp Bulb -L22- /Right
Front Fog Lamp Bulb -L23- are a shared component.

1.10 Right LED Headlamp Power Output

Module 1 -A27-/Left LED Headlamp

1. Headlamps 91
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Power Output Module 1 -A31-, Remov‐

ing and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. The
removal and installation on the right side is similar.

Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ R1.2 emoving and Instal‐
ling”, page 89 .
– Remove the bolts -2-.
– Remove the screws -3-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the Left LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1
-A31- -1- from the headlamp housing until the connector is
accessible.
– Release and disconnect the connector on the Left LED
Headlamp Power Output Module 1 -A31- -1-.
– Remove the Left LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1
-A31- -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Check the seal between the Left LED Headlamp Power Out‐
put Module 1 -A31- and the headlamp housing for damage.

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ Make sure the seal fits correctly when installing the Left
LED Headlamp Power Output Module 1 -A31-. Water
getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

– Perform a function test.

92 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp

if necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance; Booklet 42.1; Proce‐
dure Descriptions.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -1.1 Headlamps”, page 87

1.11 Turn Signal Control Module, Removing

and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. The
removal and installation on the right side is similar.

Removing
– Remove the headlamp. Refer to ⇒ R1.2 emoving and Instal‐

cardiagn.com
ling”, page 89 .
– Carefully loosen the housing cover -1- along the break line
-2- with a hammer.

– Remove the housing cover -1- with the control module for
the turn signal from the headlamp, until the connectors are
accessible.
– Release and disconnect the connectors from the turn signal
control module -1-.

– Remove the screws -arrows-.

– Remove the control module for the turn signal -1- from the
housing cover -2-.

1. Headlamps 93
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Installing

– Connect the connectors on the turn signal control module

-1-.
– Place the control module for the turn signal -1- on the head‐
lamp.
– Install and tighten the bolts -arrows-.

cardiagn.com
Caution

There is a risk of damaging the headlamp.

♦ During installation, ensure proper seating of the housing
cover. Water getting in the headlamp will cause damage.

– Install a new housing cover -1- on the headlamp.

– Perform a function test.

– Check the headlamp adjustment and adjust the headlamp
if necessary. Refer to ⇒ Maintenance; Booklet 42.1; Proce‐
dure Descriptions.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -1.1 Headlamps”, page 87

94 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

2 Side Marker Lamp

⇒ S2.1 ide Marker Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 95
⇒ S2.2 ide Marker Lamp Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page
95

2.1 Front Side Marker Lamp, Removing

and Installing

Note

The front side marker lamp is integrated in the headlamp and

cannot be replace separately if faulty.

– Headlamps, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ R1.2 emov‐

ing and Installing”, page 89 .

2.2 Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb, Remov‐

ing and Installing

cardiagn.com
Note

The front side marker lamp bulbs are LED and are integrated in
the headlamp. Replacing the LEDs is not possible. The entire
headlamp must be replaced.

– Headlamps, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ R1.2 emov‐

ing and Installing”, page 89 .

2. Side Marker Lamp 95

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

3 Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror

⇒ -3.1 Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror”, page 96
⇒ S3.2 ignal, Removing and Installing”, page 98
⇒ R3.3 earview Mirror Entry Lamp, Removing and Installing”,
page 99

3.1 Overview - Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror

cardiagn.com

96 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Mirror Base
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66;
Exterior Rearview Mir‐
ror; Exterior Rearview
Mirror, Removing and
Installing.
2 - Screw
❑ Tightening specifica‐
tion. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66;
Exterior Rearview Mir‐
ror; Overview - Exterior
Rearview Mirror.
❑ Quantity: 1
3 - Mirror Frame
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66;

cardiagn.com
Exterior Rearview Mir‐
ror; Overview - Exterior
Rearview Mirror.
4 - Bolts
❑ Tightening specifica‐
tion. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66;
Exterior Rearview Mir‐
ror; Overview - Exterior
Rearview Mirror.
❑ Quantity: 4
5 - Mirror Glass
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66;
Exterior Rearview Mir‐
ror; Mirror Glass, Removing and Installing.
6 - Wire
7 - Cover
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Overview -
Exterior Rearview Mirror.
8 - Peripheral Camera
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Communication; Rep. Gr. 91; Peripheral Camera; Component
Location Overview - Peripheral Camera.
9 - Bracket
❑ For the peripheral camera
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Communication; Rep. Gr. 91; Peripheral Camera.
10 - Bolts
❑ Tightening specification. Refer to ⇒ Communication; Rep. Gr. 91; Peripheral Camera.
❑ Quantity: 2
11 - Exterior Rearview Mirror Entry Lamp
❑ Driver Entry Lamp in Exterior Rearview Mirror -W52-
❑ Front Passenger Entry Lamp in Exterior Rearview Mirror -W53-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ R3.3 earview Mirror Entry Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page
99 .

3. Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror 97

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

12 - Screw
❑ Tightening specification. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Overview -
Exterior Rearview Mirror.
❑ Quantity: 1
13 - Turn Signal
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ S3.2 ignal, Removing and Installing”, page 98 .
14 - Screw
❑ 1 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
15 - Adjusting Unit
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Mirror
Adjustment Unit, Removing and Installing.
16 - Mirror Cap
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Mirror Cap,
Removing and Installing.

3.2 Turn Signal, Removing and Installing

cardiagn.com
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-

Note

♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side.

The removal and installation on the right side is similar.
♦ The entire exterior rearview mirror turn signal must be re‐
placed if an LED is faulty.

Removing
– Remove the mirror cap. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 66; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Mirror Cap, Removing and
Installing.
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.

– Remove the bolts -1-.

98 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release the retaining tab -5- from the cover -4-.

– Remove the turn signal -3- upward from the cover -4- at the
same time.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal while paying attention to
the following:
– Perform a function test.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -3.1 Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror”, page 96

3.3 Exterior Rearview Mirror Entry Lamp,

Removing and Installing

Note

♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side.

The removal and installation on the right side is similar.

cardiagn.com
♦ The entire exterior rearview mirror entry lamp must be re‐
placed if an LED is faulty.

Removing
– Remove the mirror frame. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep.
Gr. 66; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Overview - Exterior Rear‐
view Mirror.
– Release the retaining tab -arrow A- from the cover.

– Remove the Driver Entry Lamp in Exterior Rearview Mirror

-W52- -1- in the direction of -arrow B- from the exterior rear‐
view mirror.
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in the reverse order of removal while paying attention to
the following:
– Perform a function test.

3. Lamps in Exterior Rearview Mirror 99

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

4 Tail Lamps
⇒ -4.1 Body Tail Lamps”, page 100
⇒ -4.2 Rear Lid Tail Lamps”, page 100
⇒ L4.3 id Tail Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 101
⇒ T4.4 ail Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 103
⇒ H4.5 older, Removing and Installing”, page 103
⇒ R4.6 ight Tail Lamp BulbM2/Left Tail Lamp BulbM4, Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page 104
⇒ L4.7 eft Rear Fog Lamp BulbL46/Right Rear Fog Lamp
BulbL47, Removing and Installing”, page 105
⇒ L4.8 eft Brake/Tail Lamp BulbM21/Right Brake/Tail Lamp
BulbM22, Removing and Installing”, page 105
⇒ L4.9 amp Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page 105
⇒ S4.10 ignal Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page 105

4.1 Overview - Body Tail Lamps

cardiagn.com
1 - Fastening Element
❑ As a quick release
❑ To remove turn 90° (1/4
turn) and remove
2 - Tail Lamp
❑ Left Tail Lamp -MX3-
❑ Right Tail Lamp -MX4-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ T4.4 ail
Lamp, Removing and
Installing”, page 103 .

4.2 Overview - Rear Lid Tail Lamps

100 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Nut
❑ 3 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2
2 - Tail Lamp
❑ Left Tail Lamp 2 -MX5-
❑ Right Tail Lamp 2 -
MX6-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ L4.3 id
Tail Lamp, Removing
and Installing”, page
101 .

cardiagn.com
4.3 Rear Lid Tail Lamp, Removing and In‐
stalling

Note

♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side.

The removal and installation on the right side is similar.
♦ If an LED is faulty, the entire tail lamp must be replaced.

Removing
– Turn the light switch into neutral position.

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially availa‐
ble adhesive tape, for example, over the component in
the visible area.

– If necessary, position a narrow screwdriver at the side open‐

ing.
– Pry up the cover -1- in the direction of -arrow-.

4. Tail Lamps 101

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release and disconnect the connector -3-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the nuts -2-.
– Pivot the Left Tail Lamp 2 -MX5- -1- outward out of the rear
lid opening.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

♦ Make sure that the seal between the body and tail lamp
housing seals properly.
♦ The connector must lock into place.

– Pivot the Left Tail Lamp 2 - MX5- into the rear lid opening
from the outside.
– Align at the top and center.
– Tighten the Left Tail Lamp 2 -MX5- upper nut first then the
lower nut.
– Perform a function test.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -4.2 Rear Lid Tail Lamps”, page 100

102 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

4.4 Lower Tail Lamp, Removing and Instal‐

ling

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. The
removal and installation on the right side is similar.

Removing
– Turn the light switch into neutral position.
– Remove the access cover in the luggage compartment side
trim panel.
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the quick release -1- all the way in the direction of
-arrow A-.
– Remove the tail lamp -3- in the direction of -arrow B-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

♦ Make sure that the seal between the body and tail lamp
housing seals properly.
♦ The connector must lock into place.

– Turn the quick release -1- opposite the direction of -arrow A-

all the way and lock.
– Perform a function test.

4.5 Bulb Holder, Removing and Installing

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. The
removal and installation on the right side is similar.

4. Tail Lamps 103

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Removing
– Remove the tail lamp from the body. Refer to ⇒ T4.4 ail
Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 103 .
– Release the catches on the Left Tail Lamp -MX3- in the
direction of -arrow-.

cardiagn.com
– At the same time remove the bulb holder -1- from the Left
Tail Lamp -MX3- until the connector is accessible.
– Release and disconnect the connector on the bulb holder
-1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

4.6 Right Tail Lamp Bulb -M2-/Left Tail

Lamp Bulb -M4-, Removing and Instal‐
ling
⇒ R4.6.1 ight Tail Lamp BulbM2/Left Tail Lamp BulbM4, Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 104

4.6.1 Right Tail Lamp Bulb -M2-/Left Tail

Lamp Bulb -M4-, Removing and Instal‐
ling

Note

The tail lamp bulbs are LEDs and are integrated inside the tail
lamps. Replacing the LEDs is not possible. The tail lamp must
be completely replaced.

– Left Tail Lamp 2 -MX5-/Right Tail Lamp 2 -MX6-, Removing

and installing. Refer to ⇒ L4.3 id Tail Lamp, Removing and
Installing”, page 101 .

104 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

4.7 Left Rear Fog Lamp Bulb -L46-/Right

Rear Fog Lamp Bulb -L47-, Removing
and Installing

Note

The rear fog lamp bulbs are LEDs and are integrated inside the
tail lamps. Replacing the LEDs is not possible. The tail lamp
must be completely replaced.

– Left Tail Lamp 2 -MX5-/Right Tail Lamp 2 -MX6-, Removing

and installing. Refer to ⇒ L4.3 id Tail Lamp, Removing and
Installing”, page 101 .

4.8 Left Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb -M21-/Right

Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb -M22-, Remov‐
ing and Installing
⇒ L4.8.1 eft Brake/Tail Lamp BulbM21/Right Brake/Tail Lamp
BulbM22 ”, page 105

cardiagn.com
4.8.1 Left Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb -M21-/Right
Brake/Tail Lamp Bulb -M22-

Note

The brake and tail lamp bulbs are LEDs and are integrated
inside the tail lamps. Replacing the LEDs is not possible. The
tail lamp must be completely replaced.

– Left and Right Tail Lamp Left Tail Lamp -MX3-/Right Tail
Lamp -MX4-, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ T4.4 ail
Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 103 .

4.9 Back-Up Lamp Bulb, Removing and In‐

stalling

Note

The back-up lamp bulbs are LEDs and are integrated inside the
tail lamps. Replacing the LEDs is not possible. The tail lamp
must be completely replaced.

– Left Tail Lamp 2 -MX5-/Right Tail Lamp 2 -MX6-, Removing

and installing. Refer to ⇒ L4.3 id Tail Lamp, Removing and
Installing”, page 101 .

4.10 Turn Signal Bulb, Removing and Instal‐

ling

Note

The turn signal bulbs are LEDs and are integrated inside the tail
lamps. Replacing the LEDs is not possible. The tail lamp must
be completely replaced.

4. Tail Lamps 105

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Left Tail Lamp -MX3-/Right Tail Lamp -MX4-, Removing and

installing. Refer to ⇒ T4.4 ail Lamp, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 103 .

cardiagn.com

106 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

5 High-Mounted Brake Lamp

⇒ -5.1 High-Mounted Brake Lamp”, page 107
⇒ B5.2 rake Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page 107

5.1 Overview - High-Mounted Brake Lamp

1 - Brake Lamp Connector

2 - Washer Fluid Hose Con‐
nection
3 - High-Mounted Brake Lamp
❑ With High-Mounted
Brake Lamp Bulb -M25-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
B5.2 rake Lamp, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 107 .

cardiagn.com
5.2 High-Mounted Brake Lamp, Removing
and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Release Lever - Wedge -T10039/1-
Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent the
ignition from switching on unintentionally.

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially availa‐
ble adhesive tape, for example, over the component in
the visible area.

5. High-Mounted Brake Lamp 107

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Cover the area of the rear lid above the high-mounted brake
lamp -1- with a strip of adhesive tape -2-.

Caution

When removing the high-mounted brake lamp, make sure

the seal is not damaged.

cardiagn.com
– Insert the -T10039/1- -3- at the top between the high-moun‐
ted brake lamp -1- and rear lid -2-.

– Release the catch of the high-mounted brake lamp -1- by

pressing the plastic wedge -3- in the direction of -arrow-.
– Remove the high-mounted brake lamp -1- from the rear lid
-2- while paying attention to the connected wiring harnesses.
– Release and remove the washer fluid hose -2- from the high-
mounted brake lamp -3-.

– Release and remove the connector -1- from the high-moun‐

ted brake lamp -3-.

108 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

♦ If an LED is faulty, the entire high-mounted brake lamp must

be replaced.
♦ When installing the high-mounted brake lamp, make sure
the seal is seated correctly. The seal must not have any
kinks and must not be damaged.
♦ When connecting the washer fluid hose, make sure that the
clip engages audibly into the connection.

– Install the hose and connectors.

– Push the high-mounted brake lamp in the rear lid.
– Engage the upper hook.
– Engage the lower springs.

cardiagn.com
– Check the high-mounted brake lamp and the rear window
washer system for correct function.

5. High-Mounted Brake Lamp 109

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

6 License Plate Lamp

⇒ -6.1 License Plate Lamps”, page 110
⇒ L6.2 eft License Plate LampX4/Right License Plate LampX5,
Removing and Installing”, page 110
⇒ f6.3 or Left License Plate LampX4/Right License Plate
LampX5, Removing and Installing”, page 111

6.1 Overview - License Plate Lamps

1 - Connectors
2 - Left License Plate Lamp -
X4-/Right License Plate Lamp
-X5-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ L6.2 eft
License Plate LampX4/
Right License Plate
LampX5, Removing
and Installing”, page

cardiagn.com
110 .

6.2 Left License Plate Lamp -X4-/Right Li‐

cense Plate Lamp -X5-, Removing and
Installing

Note

♦ The removal and installation is described for the right side.

The removal and installation on the left side is similar.
♦ Since the license plate lamp is equipped with LEDs, it must
be completely replaced if faulty.

Removing
– Turn the light switch into neutral position.

110 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Press the Right License Plate Lamp -X5- -1- in the direction
of -arrow A- using a suitable tool.

– Fold the Right License Plate Lamp -X5- -1- in the direction of
-arrow B- out of the rear lid.
– Release and disconnect the connector -1-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the Right License Plate Lamp -X5- -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

Insert the license plate lamp into the rear lid so that the clip is
facing toward the right side of the vehicle.

– Perform a function test.

6.3 Bulb for Left License Plate Lamp -X4-/

Right License Plate Lamp -X5-, Re‐
moving and Installing
Since the license plate lamp is equipped with LEDs, it must be
completely replaced if faulty.
Left License Plate Lamp -X4-/Right License Plate Lamp -X5-,
Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ L6.2 eft License Plate
LampX4/Right License Plate LampX5, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 110 .

6. License Plate Lamp 111

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

7 Access/Start Authorization
⇒ L7.1 ocation Overview - Access/Start Authorization System”,
page 112
⇒ L7.2 ocation Overview - Keyless Access Authorization Sys‐
tem”, page 113
⇒ A7.3 ccess/Start System InterfaceJ965, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 115
⇒ L7.4 eft Front Exterior Door Handle Touch SensorG605 and
Right Front Exterior Door Handle Touch SensorG606, Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page 116
⇒ A7.5 ccess/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle InteriorR138,
Removing and Installing”, page 116
⇒ A7.6 ccess/Start System Antenna 2 in Vehicle InteriorR139,
Removing and Installing”, page 117
⇒ L7.7 eft Access/Start Authorization AntennaR200, Removing
and Installing”, page 117
⇒ R7.8 ight Access/Start Authorization AntennaR201, Remov‐

cardiagn.com
ing and Installing”, page 117
⇒ A7.9 ccess/Start System Antenna in Rear BumperR136, Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 118
⇒ A7.10 ccess/Start System Antenna in Luggage Compart‐
mentR137, Removing and Installing”, page 118
⇒ D7.11 river Side Rear Access/Start Authorization Anten‐
naR155 and Passenger Side Rear Access/Start Authorization
AntennaR156, Removing and Installing”, page 119
⇒ P7.12 ower Rear Lid Opening Control ModuleJ938, Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page 120
⇒ P7.13 ower Rear Lid Opening SensorG750/Power Rear Lid
Opening Sensor 2G760, Removing and Installing”, page 120

7.1 Component Location Overview - Access/Start Authorization System

112 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Access/Start System Inter‐

face -J965-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
A7.3 ccess/Start Sys‐
tem InterfaceJ965, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 115 .
2 - Anti-Theft Immobilizer
Reader Coil -D2-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
A8.10 nti-Theft Immo‐
bilizer Reader CoilD2,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 136 .
3 - Electronic Steering Col‐
umn Lock Control Module -
J764-
❑ Removing and in‐

cardiagn.com
stalling. Refer to
⇒ Suspension, Wheels,
Steering; Rep. Gr. 48;
Steering Column; Over‐
view - Steering Col‐
umn.
4 - Vehicle Electrical System
Control Module -J519-
❑ With Central Locking
and Anti-Theft Alarm
System Antenna -R47-
❑ Component Location Overview. Refer to ⇒ L2.1 ocation Overview - Control Modules”, page 240 .
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ V2.2 ehicle Electrical System Control ModuleJ519, Removing and
Installing”, page 241 .
5 - Start System Button -E378-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ S2.28 tart System ButtonE378, Removing and Installing”, page
211 .

7.2 Component Location Overview - Keyless Access Authorization System

7. Access/Start Authorization 113

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Access/Start System Inter‐

face -J965-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
A7.3 ccess/Start Sys‐
tem InterfaceJ965, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 115 .
2 - Front Passenger Side Ex‐
terior Door Handle
❑ With the Right Front
Exterior Door Handle
Touch Sensor -G606-
and Right Access/Start
Authorization Antenna -
R201-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 57;
Door Components;
Door Handle, Remov‐

cardiagn.com
ing and Installing.
3 - Right Rear Exterior Door
Handle
❑ With the Passenger
Side Rear Access/Start
Authorization Antenna -
R156-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 58;
Door Components;
Door Handle, Removing and Installing.
4 - Access/Start System Antenna In Luggage Compartment -R137-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ A7.10 ccess/Start System Antenna in Luggage Compart‐
mentR137, Removing and Installing”, page 118 .
5 - Access/Start System Antenna in Rear Bumper -R136-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ A7.9 ccess/Start System Antenna in Rear BumperR136, Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page 118 .
6 - Left Rear Exterior Door Handle
❑ With the Driver Side Rear Access/Start Authorization Antenna -R155-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 58; Door Components; Door Handle,
Removing and Installing.
7 - Driver Side Exterior Door Handle
❑ With the Left Front Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor -G605- and Left Access/Start Authorization
Antenna -R200-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 57; Door Components; Door Handle,
Removing and Installing.
8 - Access/Start System Antenna 2 in Vehicle Interior -R139-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ A7.6 ccess/Start System Antenna 2 in Vehicle InteriorR139,
Removing and Installing”, page 117 .
9 - Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior -R138-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ A7.5 ccess/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle InteriorR138,
Removing and Installing”, page 116 .

114 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

7.3 Access/Start System Interface -J965-,

Removing and Installing

Note

If the control module is replaces, perform the adaptation using

the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

Removing
– Remove the partition from the heater and A/C unit. Refer
to ⇒ Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning; Rep. Gr. 87;
Front Heater and A/C Unit; Partition, Removing and Instal‐
ling.
– Release the catch on the bracket -3- in the direction of
-arrow A-.

cardiagn.com
– At the same time remove the Access/Start System Interface
-J965- -1- in the direction of -arrow B- from the bracket -3-.
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.
– Remove the bolts -arrows- from the bracket -1-.

– Remove the bracket -1- from the heater and A/C unit.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

7. Access/Start Authorization 115

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– The Access/Start System Interface -J965- must engage au‐

dibly in the bracket.
Tightening Specifications
Component Tightening Specification
Bracket on heater and A/C unit 1.5 Nm

7.4 Left Front Exterior Door Handle Touch

Sensor -G605- and Right Front Exteri‐
or Door Handle Touch Sensor -G606-,
Removing and Installing

Note

The Left Front Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor -G605- or

the Right Front Exterior Door Handle Touch Sensor -G606- is
integrated in the respective exterior door handle and cannot be
replaced individually if faulty.

cardiagn.com
– Door Handle, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Ex‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 57; Door Components; Door Handle, Remov‐
ing and Installing.

7.5 Access/Start System Antenna 1 in Ve‐

hicle Interior -R138-, Removing and In‐
stalling
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Pry Lever -80-200-
Removing
– Remove the center console front footwell trim panel from the
front passenger side. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68;
Center Console; Front Center Console Footwell, Removing
and Installing.
– Pry out from the front passenger side footwell from the Ac‐
cess/Start System Antenna 1 in Vehicle Interior -R138- -1-
using the -80-200- from the selector mechanism -2-.

– Release and disconnect the connector -3-.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

116 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

7.6 Access/Start System Antenna 2 in Ve‐

hicle Interior -R139-, Removing and In‐
stalling
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Pry Lever -80-200-
Removing
– Remove the center console rear trim. Refer to ⇒ Body Interi‐
or; Rep. Gr. 68; Center Console; Center Console Rear Trim,
Removing and Installing.
– Pry the Access/Start System Antenna 2 in Vehicle Interior
-R139- -1- using the -80-200- in the direction of -arrow- from
the center console.

cardiagn.com
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

7.7 Left Access/Start Authorization Anten‐

na -R200-, Removing and Installing

Note

The Left Access/Start Authorization Antenna -R200- is integra‐

ted in the exterior door handle and cannot be replaced sepa‐
rately if faulty.

– Door Handle, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Ex‐

terior; Rep. Gr. 57; Door Components; Door Handle, Remov‐
ing and Installing.

7.8 Right Access/Start Authorization An‐

tenna -R201-, Removing and Installing

Note

The Right Access/Start Authorization Antenna -R201- is integra‐

ted in the exterior door handle and cannot be replaced sepa‐
rately if faulty.

7. Access/Start Authorization 117

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Door Handle, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Ex‐

terior; Rep. Gr. 57; Door Components; Door Handle, Remov‐
ing and Installing.

7.9 Access/Start System Antenna in Rear

Bumper -R136-, Removing and Instal‐
ling
Removing
– Remove the rear bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63; Rear Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing.
– Release and disconnect the connector -4-.

cardiagn.com
– Release the retaining tab -3- in the direction of -arrow-.
– At the same time remove the Access/Start System Antenna
in Rear Bumper -R136- -2- from the center guide -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

7.10 Access/Start System Antenna in Lug‐

gage Compartment -R137-, Removing
and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Pry Lever -80-200-
Removing
– Remove the left seat from the third row. Refer to ⇒ Body
Interior; Rep. Gr. 72; Third Row Seats; Seat, Removing and
Installing.
The rear carpet -1- must be cut using a carpet knife as follows,
for the accessibility to the Access/Start System Antenna in Lug‐
gage Compartment -R137- -4- and the bracket -3-.

118 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Cut the rear carpet -1- centered over both attachment points
for the left seat along the line -2- using a carpet knife.
• The cut must be parallel to the third row right seat rail.
– Fold the rear carpet -1- outward.
– Pry the Access/Start System Antenna in Luggage Compart‐
ment -R137- -1- using the -80-200- in the direction of -arrow-
from the bracket -3-.

cardiagn.com
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

7.11 Driver Side Rear Access/Start Authori‐

zation Antenna -R155- and Passenger
Side Rear Access/Start Authorization
Antenna -R156-, Removing and Instal‐
ling

Note

The Driver Side Rear Access/Start Authorization Antenna -

R155- or the Passenger Side Rear Access/Start Authorization
Antenna -R156- is integrated in the corresponding rear exterior
door handle and cannot be replaced separately if faulty.

– Removing and installing the door handle. Refer to ⇒ Body

Exterior; Rep. Gr. 58; Door Components; Door Handle, Re‐
moving and Installing.

7. Access/Start Authorization 119

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

7.12 Power Rear Lid Opening Control Mod‐

ule -J938-, Removing and Installing
Removing

Note

The Rear Lid Opener Control Module -J938- is installed behind

the rear bumper cover. It can be removed and installed through
the trailer hitch cut-out.

– Release and disconnect the connectors -3-.

cardiagn.com
– Release the locking tab on the bracket -2- in the direction of
-arrow A-.
– Pivot the Power Rear Lid Opening Control Module -J938-
-1- out of the bracket -2- in the direction of -arrow B- and
remove it.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

7.13 Power Rear Lid Opening Sensor -

G750-/Power Rear Lid Opening Sen‐
sor 2 -G760-, Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the rear bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63; Rear Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing.
– Free up the wiring harness at the upper bracket -3-.

– Release and disconnect the connector -7-.

120 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the bracket -1- from the rear bumper cover.

– Release the retaining tab -4- on the upper bracket cover -3-
and open the cover in the direction of -arrow-.
– Release the retaining tab -4- on the lower bracket cover -6-
and open the cover in the direction of -arrow-.
– Unclip the Power Rear Lid Opener Sensor -G750- / Rear Lid
Opener Sensor 2 -G760- -2- from the upper bracket -3- and
the lower bracket -6-.
If necessary for additional procedures, remove the upper brack‐
et -3- and lower bracket -6- as follows:
– Remove the upper bracket -3- with the clips from the rear
bumper cover.
– Remove the expanding rivet -5- from the lower bracket -6-
and remove the lower bracket -6- from the rear bumper cov‐
er.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

cardiagn.com

7. Access/Start Authorization 121

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

8 Steering Column Switch Module

⇒ -8.1 Steering Column Switch Module”, page 122
⇒ C8.2 ylinder, Removing and Installing”, page 125
⇒ I8.3 gnition Switch Key Lock SolenoidN376, Removing and
Installing”, page 126
⇒ S8.4 witch, Removing and Installing”, page 127
⇒ C8.5 olumn Switch Module, Removing and Installing”, page
128
⇒ S8.6 teering Column Electronics Control ModuleJ527, Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 131
⇒ T8.7 urn Signal SwitchE2, Removing and Installing”, page
134
⇒ C8.8 ruise Control SwitchE45, Removing and Installing”,
page 135
⇒ W8.9 indshield Wiper Intermittent Mode SwitchE22, Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page 135

cardiagn.com
⇒ A8.10 nti-Theft Immobilizer Reader CoilD2, Removing and
Installing”, page 136
⇒ C8.11 olumn Combination Switch Base Carrier, Removing
and Installing”, page 137
⇒ L8.12 ock Housing, Removing and Installing”, page 138

8.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch

Module
⇒ -8.1.1 Steering Column Switch Module, with Mechanical Igni‐
tion Lock”, page 122
⇒ -8.1.2 Steering Column Switch Module, with Electronic Igni‐
tion Lock”, page 123

8.1.1 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module, with Mechanical Ignition

Lock

122 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Bolts
❑ Shear bolts for steering
lock housing
❑ Quantity: 2
2 - Steering Column Electron‐
ics Control Module -J527-
❑ With Airbag Spiral
Spring/Return Spring
with Slip Ring -F138-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
S8.6 teering Column
Electronics Control
ModuleJ527, Removing
and Installing”, page
131 .
3 - Bolts
❑ 1.1 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3

cardiagn.com
4 - Steering Column Combi‐
nation Switch
❑ With Turn Signal
Switch -E2-, Wind‐
shield Wiper Intermit‐
tent Mode Switch -E22-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
T8.7 urn Signal
SwitchE2, Removing
and Installing”, page
134 .
5 - Base Carrier
❑ For the steering column
combination switch
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ C8.11.1 olumn Combination Switch Base Carrier, Removing and Installing, Vehicle
with Mechanical Ignition Lock”, page 137 .
6 - Steering Lock Housing
❑ With lock cylinder and Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil -D2-
❑ Steering Lock Housing, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ L8.12 ock Housing, Removing and
Installing”, page 138 .
❑ Lock Cylinder, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ C8.2 ylinder, Removing and Installing”, page 125 .
❑ Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil -D2-, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ I8.10.1 mmobilizer
Reader Coil, Removing and Installing, Vehicle with Mechanical Ignition Lock”, page 136 .
7 - Ignition/Starter Switch -D-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ S8.4 witch, Removing and Installing”, page 127 .
8 - Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid -N376-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ I8.3 gnition Switch Key Lock SolenoidN376, Removing and
Installing”, page 126 .
9 - Steering Column
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 48; Steering Column; Overview -
Steering Column.

8.1.2 Overview - Steering Column Switch Module, with Electronic Ignition Lock

8. Steering Column Switch Module 123

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Start System Button -

E378-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
S2.28 tart System
ButtonE378, Removing
and Installing”, page
211 .
2 - Steering Column Electron‐
ics Control Module -J527-
❑ With Airbag Spiral
Spring/Return Spring
with Slip Ring -F138-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
S8.6 teering Column
Electronics Control
ModuleJ527, Removing
and Installing”, page
131 .

cardiagn.com
3 - Bolts
❑ 1.1 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3
4 - Steering Column Combi‐
nation Switch
❑ With Turn Signal
Switch -E2-, Wind‐
shield Wiper Intermit‐
tent Mode Switch -E22-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
T8.7 urn Signal
SwitchE2, Removing
and Installing”, page
134 .
5 - Base Carrier
❑ For the steering column combination switch
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ C8.11.2 olumn Combination Switch Base Carrier, Removing and
Installing, Vehicles with Electronic Ignition Lock”, page 137 .
6 - Screw
❑ Lower steering column trim panel retainer
❑ Tightening specification. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68; Storage Compartments and Covers;
Overview - Steering Column Trim Panel.
7 - Electronic Steering Column Lock Control Module -J764-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep. Gr. 48; Steering Column;
Electronic Steering Column Lock Control Module -J764-, Removing and Installing
8 - Bolts
❑ 9 Nm
❑ For the base carrier for the steering column combination switch
❑ Quantity: 2
9 - Ignition Key
10 - Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil -D2-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ I8.10.2 mmobilizer Reader Coil, Removing and Installing, Vehicle
with Electronic Ignition Lock”, page 136 .

124 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

8.2 Lock Cylinder, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Locking Pin (3 pc.) -T40011- or
♦ Suitable welding wire
Removing
– Remove the lower steering column trim panel. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68; Storage Compartments/Cov‐
ers; Lower Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and In‐
stalling.

Note

♦ If necessary, fold in the ignition key to remove the lock cylin‐

der.
♦ The right lock position is shown without the ignition key to
provide a better illustration.

– Turn the ignition key to the ignition “on” position. While doing

cardiagn.com
so, the cut-out in the trim -arrow- aligns with the hole in the
ignition lock.

– Fold the ignition key as far as it possible.

– Push the -T40011- or a suitable welding wire (if necessary)

all the way into the hole -2-.
– Remove the lock cylinder -1- from the steering lock housing.

8. Steering Column Switch Module 125

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

WARNING

Risk of steering lock seizing.

♦ Steering lock must not be operated without a lock cylin‐
der.

Note

♦ A jammed steering lock must be replaced.

♦ The reader coil is integrated in the lock cylinder and cannot
be replaced separately.
♦ If the reader coil is faulty, the entire lock cylinder must be
replaced.
♦ The vehicle-specific lock number along with the VIN is nee‐
ded to order a new lock cylinder through the distribution
center or importer.

cardiagn.com
– Release and disconnect the connector from the reader coil.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Insert the ignition key into the lock cylinder and turn it to the
ignition “on” position.
– Slide the -T40011- or a suitable welding wire (if necessary)
all the way into the front hole again.
– Connect the connector to the anti-theft immobilizer reader
coil.
– Insert the lock cylinder -1- with the reader coil into the steer‐
ing lock housing -3-.

– Remove the -T40011- from the hole -2-.

– Push the lock cylinder in firmly until the locking mechanism
engages audibly.

8.3 Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid -

N376-, Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the lower steering column trim panel. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68; Storage Compartments/Cov‐
ers; Lower Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and In‐
stalling.

126 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release the retainer in direction of -arrow A- and remove

the Ignition Switch Key Lock Solenoid -N376- -2- from the
steering lock housing -1- in direction of -arrow B-.

– The connector will disconnect at the same time.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

cardiagn.com
8.4 Ignition/Starter Switch, Removing and
Installing
Removing
– Remove the lower steering column trim panel. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68; Storage Compartments/Cov‐
ers; Lower Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and In‐
stalling.
– Release and disconnect the connector -1-.

– Release the retainers -2 and 3- at the openings -arrows- in

the steering lock housing -4- by inserting jeweler's screwdriv‐
ers.
If the procedure is not possible because there is not enough
space, create a tool from two wire hooks as follows.

8. Steering Column Switch Module 127

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Bend the one end of a welding wire to form a 1 mm eye.

– Cut the welding wire down to the length -a-.
♦ Dimension -a- = approximately 50 mm.
– File the end of the wire hook into a point.
♦ Dimension -b- = 5 mm.
– Remove the Ignition/Starter Switch -D- -5- from the steering

cardiagn.com
lock housing. The jeweler's screwdrivers or wire hooks must
remain inserted.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Insert the Ignition/Starter Switch -D- into the steering lock
housing until it audibly engages.

8.5 Steering Column Switch Module, Re‐

moving and Installing
Removing
– Place the front wheels in a straight-ahead position - steering
wheel in neutral position.
– Position the steering wheel as far back and down as possi‐
ble. Use the entire adjustment range of the steering column
adjustment for this.

128 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the steering wheel. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels,

Steering; Rep. Gr. 48; Steering Wheel; Steering Wheel, Re‐
moving and Installing.
– Remove the lower steering column trim panel. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68; Storage Compartments/Cov‐
ers; Lower Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and In‐
stalling.

WARNING

Risk of destroying electronic components with static dis‐

charge.
♦ Before disconnecting the connector, discharge static
electricity from the body by touching a grounded vehicle
component such as the door striker.

Note

Depending on vehicle equipment the number of connectors on the Steering Column Electronics Control

cardiagn.com
Module -J527- can vary.

8. Steering Column Switch Module 129

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Pull out the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow A-

and press down.
– Disconnect the connector -1-.
– Pull out the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow B-
and press down.
– Disconnect the connector -2-.
– Push the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow C- and
disconnect the connector -3-.

cardiagn.com
– Push the release -1- on both sides in the direction of
-arrow A-.
– Pull the steering column switch module -2- out slightly.
– Push the release -3- in the direction of -arrow B-.
– Remove the steering column switch module -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Pay attention that the steering column switch module is cor‐
rectly engaged.

130 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– If a new Steering Column Electronics Control Module -J527-

is installed, remove the transportation safeguard just before
installing the steering wheel.

8.6 Steering Column Electronics Control

Module -J527-, Removing and Instal‐
ling
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-

Note

♦ The Airbag Spiral Spring/Return Spring with Slip Ring -F138-

is integrated into the Steering Column Electronics Control
Module -J527-.
♦ If the control module is replaces, perform the adaptation
using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

Removing

cardiagn.com
– Place the front wheels in a straight-ahead position - steering
wheel in neutral position.
– Position the steering wheel as far back and down as possi‐
ble. Use the entire adjustment range of the steering column
adjustment for this.
– Remove the steering wheel. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels,
Steering; Rep. Gr. 48; Steering Wheel; Steering Wheel, Re‐
moving and Installing.
– Remove the lower steering column trim panel. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68; Storage Compartments/Cov‐
ers; Lower Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and In‐
stalling.

WARNING

Risk of destroying electronic components with static dis‐

charge.
♦ Before disconnecting the connector, discharge static
electricity from the body by touching a grounded vehicle
component such as the door striker.

Note

Depending on vehicle equipment the number of connectors on the Steering Column Electronics Control
Module -J527- can vary.

8. Steering Column Switch Module 131

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

cardiagn.com
– Push the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow A- and
disconnect the connector -1-.
– Push the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow B- and
disconnect the connector -2-.
– Push the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow C- and
disconnect the connector -3-.
– Pull out the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow D-
and press down.
– Disconnect the connector -4-.
– Push the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow E- and
disconnect the connector -5-.
– Pull out the connector lock in the direction of the -arrow F-
and press down.
– Disconnect the connector -6-.

132 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

cardiagn.com
– Remove the bolts -1-.
– Remove the Steering Column Electronics Control Module
-J527- -2- from the Steering Column Combination Switch
-E595-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– If a new Steering Column Electronics Control Module -J527-
is installed, remove the transportation safeguard just before
installing the steering wheel.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -8.1 Steering Column Switch Module”, page 122

8. Steering Column Switch Module 133

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

8.7 Turn Signal Switch -E2-, Removing and Installing

Note

♦ Turn Signal Switch -E2-, Cruise Control Switch -E45- and the Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch
-E22- together make up the Steering Column Combination Switch -E595-.
♦ The switches cannot be separated.
♦ If an individual switch is faulty, the Steering Column Combination Switch -E595- must be replaced.

Removing
– Remove the Steering Column Electronics Control Module
-J527-. Refer to ⇒ S8.6 teering Column Electronics Control
ModuleJ527, Removing and Installing”, page 131 .

cardiagn.com

– Push the release -1- on both sides in the direction of

-arrow A-.
– Slightly remove the Steering Column Combination Switch
-E595- -2-.
– Push the release -3- in the direction of -arrow B-.

134 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the Steering Column Combination Switch -E595-

-2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Pay attention that the Steering Column Combination Switch
-E595- is correctly engaged.

8.8 Cruise Control Switch -E45-, Removing

and Installing

Note

♦ Turn Signal Switch -E2-, Cruise Control Switch -E45- and

the Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch -E22- to‐
gether make up the Steering Column Combination Switch
-E595-.
♦ The switches cannot be separated.
♦ If an individual switch is faulty, the Steering Column Combi‐

cardiagn.com
nation Switch -E595- must be replaced.

– Turn Signal Switch -E2-, Removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ T8.7 urn Signal SwitchE2, Removing and Installing”, page
134 .

8.9 Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode

Switch -E22-, Removing and Installing

Note

♦ Turn Signal Switch -E2-, Cruise Control Switch -E45- and

the Windshield Wiper Intermittent Mode Switch -E22- to‐
gether make up the Steering Column Combination Switch
-E595-.
♦ The switches cannot be separated.
♦ If an individual switch is faulty, the Steering Column Combi‐
nation Switch -E595- must be replaced.

– Turn Signal Switch -E2-, Removing and installing. Refer to

⇒ T8.7 urn Signal SwitchE2, Removing and Installing”, page
134 .

8. Steering Column Switch Module 135

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

8.10 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil -

D2-, Removing and Installing
⇒ I8.10.1 mmobilizer Reader Coil, Removing and Installing, Ve‐
hicle with Mechanical Ignition Lock”, page 136
⇒ I8.10.2 mmobilizer Reader Coil, Removing and Installing, Ve‐
hicle with Electronic Ignition Lock”, page 136

8.10.1 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil,

Removing and Installing, Vehicle with
Mechanical Ignition Lock

Note

The Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil -D2- is integrated in the

lock cylinder and cannot be replaced separately.

– Lock Cylinder, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ C8.2 ylin‐

der, Removing and Installing”, page 125 .

cardiagn.com
8.10.2 Anti-Theft Immobilizer Reader Coil,
Removing and Installing, Vehicle with
Electronic Ignition Lock
Removing
– Adjust the steering wheel as far downward and to the rear
as possible. To do so, use the entire adjustment range of the
steering column adjustment.
– Remove the lower steering column trim panel. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68; Storage Compartments/Cov‐
ers; Lower Steering Column Trim Panel, Removing and In‐
stalling.
– Push the reader coil -2- out of the mount -1- in the direction
of -arrow A-.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Press the reader coil into the mount until it engages audibly.

136 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

8.11 Steering Column Combination Switch

Base Carrier, Removing and Installing
⇒ C8.11.1 olumn Combination Switch Base Carrier, Removing
and Installing, Vehicle with Mechanical Ignition Lock”, page 137
⇒ C8.11.2 olumn Combination Switch Base Carrier, Removing
and Installing, Vehicles with Electronic Ignition Lock”, page 137

8.11.1 Steering Column Combination Switch

Base Carrier, Removing and Installing,
Vehicle with Mechanical Ignition Lock

Note

The base carrier for the steering column combination switch is

removed and installed together with the steering lock housing.

– Steering Lock Housing, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒

L8.12 ock Housing, Removing and Installing”, page 138 .

cardiagn.com
8.11.2 Steering Column Combination Switch
Base Carrier, Removing and Installing,
Vehicles with Electronic Ignition Lock
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-
Removing
– Remove the steering column switch module. Refer to ⇒
C8.5 olumn Switch Module, Removing and Installing”, page
128 .
– Remove the screws -arrows-.

– Remove the base carrier for the steering column combina‐

tion switch -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -8.1.2 Steering Column Switch Module, with
Electronic Ignition Lock”, page 123

8. Steering Column Switch Module 137

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

8.12 Steering Lock Housing, Removing and

Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Power Fastener Extractor 7/16" -BET714-
Removing
– Remove the steering column switch module. Refer to ⇒
C8.5 olumn Switch Module, Removing and Installing”, page
128 .
– Release and disconnect the connector from the Anti-Theft
Immobilizer Reader Coil -D2-.

Note

If the shear bolts -1- cannot be removed using the -BET714-,

use an angled drill and an 8.5 mm diameter bit to drill it out.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the shear bolts -1- using the -BET714-.
– Remove the steering lock housing -3- with base carrier for
the steering column combination switch -2-.
– Remove the steering lock housing from the steering column
combination switch base carrier.
To replace the steering lock housing, the ignition/starter switch
and lock cylinder must be removed.
– Remove the ignition/starter switch. Refer to ⇒ S8.4 witch,
Removing and Installing”, page 127 .
– Remove the lock cylinder. Refer to ⇒ C8.2 ylinder, Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page 125 .
Installing
• Ignition/Starter Switch, Installing. Refer to ⇒ S8.4 witch, Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 127 .
• Lock Cylinder, Installing. Refer to ⇒ C8.2 ylinder, Removing
and Installing”, page 125 .
– Install the steering lock housing -3- in the base carrier for the
steering column combination switch -2-.

138 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Slide the Steering Column Combination Switch -E595- onto

the steering column switch mount until it locks in place.
– Slide the pre-assembled unit consisting of the steering lock
housing, steering column combination switch, and Steering
Column Combination Switch -E595- straight onto the steer‐
ing column until it stops and align it to the threaded holes.
– Attach the steering lock housing -3- to the steering column
with new shear bolts -1-.

cardiagn.com
– Tighten the new shear bolts -1- until the bolt heads shear off.
Further installation occurs in the reverse order of removal.

8. Steering Column Switch Module 139

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

9 Parking Aid
⇒ -9.1 Parking Aid”, page 140
⇒ P9.2 arking Aid Control ModuleJ446, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 142
⇒ F9.3 ront Parking Aid Warning BuzzerH22, Removing and
Installing”, page 142
⇒ R9.4 ear Parking Aid Warning BuzzerH15, Removing and
Installing”, page 143
⇒ P9.5 arking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 144
⇒ P9.6 arking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 145

9.1 Overview - Parking Aid

cardiagn.com

140 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Parking Aid Button -E266-

❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
P2.8 arking Aid But‐
tonE266, Removing
and Installing”, page
201 .
2 - Rear Parking Aid Warning
Buzzer -H15-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
R9.4 ear Parking Aid
Warning BuzzerH15,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 143 .
3 - Right Rear Parking Aid
Sensor -G206-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
P9.6 arking Aid Sen‐

cardiagn.com
sor, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 145 .
4 - Right Rear Center Parking
Aid Sensor -G205-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
P9.6 arking Aid Sen‐
sor, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 145 .
5 - Left Rear Center Parking
Aid Sensor -G204-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ P9.6 arking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 145 .
6 - Left Rear Parking Aid Sensor -G203-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ P9.6 arking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 145 .
7 - Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer -H22-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ F9.3 ront Parking Aid Warning BuzzerH22, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 142 .
8 - Parking Aid Control Module -J446-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ P9.2 arking Aid Control ModuleJ446, Removing and Installing”,
page 142 .
9 - Left Front Parking Aid Sensor -G255-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ P9.5 arking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 144 .
10 - Left Front Center Parking Aid Sensor -G254-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ P9.5 arking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 144 .
11 - Right Front Center Parking Aid Sensor -G253-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ P9.5 arking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 144 .
12 - Right Front Parking Aid Sensor -G252-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ P9.5 arking Aid Sensor, Removing and Installing”, page 144 .

9. Parking Aid 141

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

9.2 Parking Aid Control Module -J446-,

Removing and Installing

Note

If the control module is replaces, perform the adaptation using

the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

Removing
– Remove the footwell cover on the driver side. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68; Storage Compartment/Covers.
– Release and disconnect the connectors -2 and 3-.

cardiagn.com
– Release the retaining tab in the direction of -arrow-.
– Remove the Parking Aid Control Module -J446- -1- down‐
ward from the bracket.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

9.3 Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer -

H22-, Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the driver side storage compartment. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68; Storage Compartment/Covers;
Component Location Overview - Storage Compartment/Cov‐
ers.
– Remove the Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer -H22- -1-
using a suitable screwdriver in the direction of -arrow- from
the mount.

142 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.

cardiagn.com
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

9.4 Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer -

H15-, Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the right luggage compartment side trim panel. Re‐
fer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70; Luggage Compartment
Trim Panels; Luggage Compartment Side Trim Panel, Re‐
moving and Installing.
– Remove the expanding rivets -1 and 3-.

– Remove the Rear Parking Aid Warning Buzzer -H15- -4-.

– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

9. Parking Aid 143

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

9.5 Front Parking Aid Sensor, Removing

and Installing
Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent
switching on the ignition unintentionally.
Outer sensors
The front outer parking aid sensor can be remove and installed
without removing the front bumper cover.
– Loosen the front section of the wheel housing liner; do not
completely remove it. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66;
Wheel Housing Liner; Front Wheel Housing Liner, Removing
and Installing.
– Press both catches in the direction of -arrow A- and at the
same time press sensor -1- inward from outside.

cardiagn.com
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.
Interior sensor
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63; Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing.
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.

• Remove the connector -2- straight from the parking aid sen‐
sor -1-.
– Press both catches in the direction of -arrow- and press the
sensor -1- inward from outside.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

144 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Note

♦ When inserting the sensor into the sensor mount, make sure
that the decoupling ring (black silicone ring) is seated cor‐
rectly on the sensor head.
♦ Both sensor mount retaining brackets must engage audibly
when installing the sensor.

Interior sensor
– First install the parking aid sensor in the bracket and engage
securely.
– Then push the connector straight on the parking aid sensor
and engage.

9.6 Rear Parking Aid Sensor, Removing

and Installing
Removing
– Remove the rear bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;

cardiagn.com
Rep. Gr. 63; Rear Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing.
– Press both catches in the direction of -arrow A- and at the
same time press sensor -1- inward from outside.

– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

♦ When inserting the sensor into the sensor mount, make sure
that the decoupling ring (black silicone ring) is seated cor‐
rectly on the sensor head.
♦ Both sensor mount retaining brackets must engage audibly
when installing the sensor.

9. Parking Aid 145

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

10 Parallel Parking Assist

⇒ -10.1 Parallel Parking Assist”, page 146
⇒ P10.2 arallel Parking Assistance Control ModuleJ791, Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 147
⇒ S10.3 ensor, Removing and Installing”, page 147
⇒ S10.4 ensor, Removing and Installing”, page 147

10.1 Overview - Parallel Parking Assist

1 - Parallel Parking Assis‐

tance Button -E581-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
P2.10 arallel Park‐
ing Assistance But‐
tonE581, Removing
and Installing”, page
201 .

cardiagn.com
2 - Right Rear Parallel Park‐
ing Assistance Sensor -G717-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
S10.4 ensor, Removing
and Installing”, page
147 .
3 - Left Rear Parallel Parking
Assistance Sensor -G716-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
S10.4 ensor, Removing
and Installing”, page
147 .
4 - Parallel Parking Assis‐
tance Control Module -J791-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
P10.2 arallel Parking
Assistance Control
ModuleJ791, Removing
and Installing”, page
147 .
5 - Left Front Parallel Parking Assistance Sensor -G568-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ S10.3 ensor, Removing and Installing”, page 147 .
6 - Right Front Parallel Parking Assistance Sensor -G569-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ S10.3 ensor, Removing and Installing”, page 147 .

146 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

10.2 Parallel Parking Assistance Control

Module -J791-, Removing and Instal‐
ling

Note

The removal and installation of the Parallel Parking Assistance

Control Module -J791- is identical to the removal and installa‐
tion of the Parking Aid Control Module -J446-.

– Parking Aid Control Module -J446-, Removing and installing.

Refer to ⇒ P9.2 arking Aid Control ModuleJ446, Removing
and Installing”, page 142 .

10.3 Front Sensor, Removing and Installing

Removing
– Loosen the front section of the wheel housing liner; do not
completely remove it. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior; Rep. Gr. 66;
Wheel Housing Liner; Front Wheel Housing Liner, Removing

cardiagn.com
and Installing.
– Press both catches in the direction of -arrow A- and press
the sensor -1- inward from outside.

– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

♦ When inserting the sensor into the sensor mount, make sure
that the decoupling ring (black silicone ring) is seated cor‐
rectly on the sensor head.
♦ Both sensor mount retaining brackets must engage audibly
when installing the sensor.

10.4 Rear Sensor, Removing and Installing

Removing
– Remove the rear bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63; Rear Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing.
– Press both catches in the direction of -arrow A- and at the
same time press sensor -1- inward from outside.

10. Parallel Parking Assist 147

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

cardiagn.com
♦ When inserting the sensor into the sensor mount, make sure
that the decoupling ring (black silicone ring) is seated cor‐
rectly on the sensor head.
♦ Both sensor mount retaining brackets must engage audibly
when installing the sensor.

148 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

11 Automatic Headlamp Range Control

⇒ -11.1 Automatic Headlamp Range Control”, page 149
⇒ C11.2 ornering Lamp and Headlamp Range Control Modu‐
leJ745, Removing and Installing”, page 149

11.1 Overview - Automatic Headlamp Range Control

1 - Cornering Lamp and

Headlamp Range Control
Module -J745-
❑ On the mounting brack‐
et pedal assembly
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
C11.2 ornering Lamp
and Headlamp Range
Control ModuleJ745,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 149 .

cardiagn.com
2 - Left Rear Level Control
System Sensor -G76-
❑ Overview. Refer to
⇒ Suspension, Wheels,
Steering; Rep. Gr. 43;
Level Control System
Sensor: Overview -
Rear Level Control
System Sensor.
3 - Left Headlamp Range
Control Adjustment Motor -
V48-
4 - Right Headlamp Range
Control Adjustment Motor -
V49-

11.2 Cornering Lamp and Headlamp Range

Control Module -J745-, Removing and
Installing

Note

If the control module is replaces, perform the adaptation using

the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent
switching on the ignition unintentionally.
– If equipped, remove the driver side knee airbag. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 69; Knee Airbags; Knee Airbag
with Igniter, Removing and Installing.

11. Automatic Headlamp Range Control 149

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the driver side footwell vent. Refer to ⇒ Heating,

Ventilation and Air Conditioning; Rep. Gr. 87; Air Routing;
Driver Side Footwell Vent, Removing and Installing.
– Release the retaining tabs -2- from the bracket -3-.

– At the same time remove the Cornering Lamp and Head‐

lamp Range Control Module -J745- -1- in the direction of
-arrow- from the bracket -3-.

cardiagn.com
– Release and disconnect the connector -4-.
– Remove the expanding rivets -2-.

– Remove the bracket -1- from the pedal assembly mounting

bracket.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

150 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

12 Trailer Hitch
⇒ T12.2 railer SocketU10 ”, page 151
⇒ T12.3 owing Recognition Control ModuleJ345, Removing and
Installing”, page 151

12.1 Overview - Trailer Hitch Socket

1 - Towing Recognition Con‐

trol Module -J345-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
T12.3 owing Recog‐
nition Control Modu‐
leJ345, Removing and
Installing”, page 151 .
2 - Screw
❑ 2.5 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2

cardiagn.com
3 - Connectors
4 - Trailer Socket -U10-
❑ Connector assignment.
Refer to ⇒ T12.2 rail‐
er SocketU10 ”, page
151 .

12.2 Trailer Socket -U10-

Connector assignment at the Trailer Socket -U10-:
The exact connector assignment can be found in the applicable
wiring diagram. Refer to ⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting &
Component locations.

12.3 Towing Recognition Control Module -

J345-, Removing and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-

Note

If the control module is replaces, perform the adaptation using

the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

12. Trailer Hitch 151

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent
switching on the ignition unintentionally.
– Remove the luggage compartment left trim panel. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70; Luggage Compartment Trim
Panels; Luggage Compartment Side Trim Panel, Removing
and Installing.
– Loosen the bolts -2- several turns.

cardiagn.com
– Push the Towing Recognition Control Module -J345- -1-
slightly upward.
– Guide the bolts -2- on the Towing Recognition Control Mod‐
ule -J345- -1- outward out of the body panel.
– Guide the Towing Recognition Control Module -J345- -1-
through the opening in the body panel in the luggage com‐
partment.
– Release and disconnect the connectors -3-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -12.1 Trailer Hitch Socket”, page 151

152 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

13 Blind Spot Detection

⇒ -13.1 Blind Spot Detection”, page 153
⇒ S13.2 pot Detection Warning Lamp in Left and Right Exterior
Mirror K303/K304, Removing and Installing”, page 154
⇒ B13.3 lind Spot Detection Control ModuleJ1086 / Blind Spot
Detection Control Module 2J1087, Removing and Installing”,
page 155
⇒ S13.4 pot Detection, Calibrating”, page 156

13.1 Overview - Blind Spot Detection

cardiagn.com

13. Blind Spot Detection 153

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Blind Spot Detection

Warning Lamp in Left Exterior
Mirror -K303-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
S13.2 pot Detection
Warning Lamp in Left
and Right Exterior Mir‐
ror K303/K304, Remov‐
ing and Installing”,
page 154 .
2 - Blind Spot Detection
Warning Lamp in Right Exteri‐
or Mirror -K304-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
S13.2 pot Detection
Warning Lamp in Left
and Right Exterior Mir‐
ror K303/K304, Remov‐
ing and Installing”,

cardiagn.com
page 154 .
3 - Bracket
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
B13.3 lind Spot De‐
tection Control Modu‐
leJ1086 / Blind Spot
Detection Control Mod‐
ule 2J1087, Removing
and Installing”, page
155 .
4 - Blind Spot Detection Control Module -J1086-
❑ Master
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ B13.3 lind Spot Detection Control ModuleJ1086 / Blind Spot
Detection Control Module 2J1087, Removing and Installing”, page 155 .
❑ Calibrating. Refer to ⇒ S13.4 pot Detection, Calibrating”, page 156 .
5 - Nuts
❑ 3.5 Nm
❑ Quantity: 2 on each side
6 - Connector
7 - Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 -J1087-
❑ Slave
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ B13.3 lind Spot Detection Control ModuleJ1086 / Blind Spot
Detection Control Module 2J1087, Removing and Installing”, page 155 .
❑ Calibrating. Refer to ⇒ S13.4 pot Detection, Calibrating”, page 156 .

13.2 Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in

Left and Right Exterior Mirror -K303-/-
K304-, Removing and Installing
The Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Left Exterior Mirror
-K303-/Blind Spot Detection Warning Lamp in Right Exterior
Mirror -K304- is located in the mirror glass and cannot be re‐
placed separately.

154 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove and install the mirror glass. Refer to ⇒ Body Exte‐

rior; Rep. Gr. 66; Exterior Rearview Mirror; Mirror Glass,
Removing and Installing.

13.3 Blind Spot Detection Control Module -

J1086- / Blind Spot Detection Control
Module 2 -J1087-, Removing and In‐
stalling
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. The
removal and installation on the right side is similar.

Removing
– Remove the rear bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;

cardiagn.com
Rep. Gr. 63; Rear Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing.
– Release the retaining tab -5- from the bracket -2-.

– Remove the Blind Spot Detection Control Module 2 -J1087-

-1- in direction of -arrow- out of the bracket -2- until the
connector -3- is accessible.
– Release and disconnect the connector -3-.
– Remove the nuts -4- for the bracket -2-
– Remove the bracket -2- from the body.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

♦ The blind spot detection calibration normally occurs auto‐

matically.
♦ Static calibration is only required when there is a DTC mem‐
ory entry.

Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ -13.1 Blind Spot Detection”, page 153

13. Blind Spot Detection 155

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

13.4 Blind Spot Detection, Calibrating

13.4.1 Preparing for Calibration

Conditions
The blind spot detection must be calibrated for the following
conditions:
♦ Corresponding DTC stored in the DTC memory for the Blind
Spot Detection Control Module -J1086- / Blind Spot Detec‐
tion Control Module 2 -J1087-. Use the Vehicle Diagnostic
Tester.

Note

The vehicle in the illustration is only a basic outline.

cardiagn.com

156 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - VW Emblem
❑ The laser pointer is
aligned on the center of
the Volkswagen logo
2 - Calibration Tool -
Wheel Center Mountings -
VAS6350/1-
❑ With 17 mm wheel bolt
adapter and measure
paddle
3 - Catch Bracket
❑ To mount the Calibra‐
tion Tool - Spacing La‐
ser -VAS6350/2- for the
distance measurement
❑ Distance to the Cali‐
bration Tool - Wheel
Center Mountings -
VAS6350/1- on the rear
wheels: dimension -a-

cardiagn.com
= 1700 ± 10 mm
4 - Measuring Scale
❑ For positioning the Cal‐
ibration Tool - Lane
Change Calibration
Tool -VAS6350/4-
❑ Dimension to be adjus‐
ted measuring point on
steel ruler = 800 mm
5 - Calibration Tool - Spacing
Laser -VAS6350/2-
❑ For distance measure‐
ment
❑ Usage information. Re‐
fer to the Operating In‐
structions.
6 - Calibration Tool - Linear Laser -VAS6350/3A-
❑ With “laser protective eyewear”
❑ On the Calibration Tool -VAS6350A-
❑ Usage information. Refer to the Operating Instructions.
7 - Plastic Foot
❑ Can be adjusted when setting the horizontal position of the Calibration Tool -VAS6350A-
❑ Quantity: 3
8 - Calibration Tool -VAS6350A-
9 - Level
❑ On the Calibration Tool -VAS6350A-
❑ For checking the horizontal position of the Calibration Tool -VAS6350A-
10 - Calibration Tool - Lane Change Calibration Tool -VAS6350/4-
❑ Is moved from the left to the right side of measuring field during calibration
❑ When installed correctly, the vehicle electrical system voltage line must be connected at lower left of
the calibration device (as seen in direction of travel)
❑ Height of the upper edge of the calibration device to the floor: 811 mm

13. Blind Spot Detection 157

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

13.4.2 Calibration Preparation Work

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Calibration Unit -VAS6350A-
♦ Vehicle Diagnostic Tester
There is much preparation work that must be performed before
calibrating using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.
Requirements:
• Move the vehicle onto a secure flat surface.
• Apply the parking brake - the vehicle must not move during
the measurement.
• Place the front wheels in a straight-ahead position - steering
wheel in neutral position.
• No persons may be in the vehicle interior during the meas‐
urement.
• Do not open and close the vehicle doors during calibration.
Procedure

cardiagn.com
– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.
– Switch the ignition on.
– Tighten three wheel bolt adapters (17 mm) for the wheel
bolts on each -VAS6350/1A-.

– Insert the measuring paddle on both -VAS6350/1A- and se‐

cure it with the locking nut.
– Place the -VAS6350/1A- onto the wheel bolts on both rear
wheels.
• The wheel center mounting rotation center must be in the
wheel rotation center.

Note

Place the -VAS6350/1A- on the wheels so that the “anti-theft

wheel bolts” are not connected with wheel center mounting.

– Adjust the measuring paddles using the lock nuts so that

they move freely just above the floor.
• The measuring paddles must move easily.
• The measuring paddles must be vertical.
– Position the -VAS6350A- at distance -a- to the rear wheels.

158 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

• Dimension -a- = 1,700 ± 10 mm

– Switch on the -VAS6350/2A- with the ON button.

cardiagn.com
Display on the -VAS6350/2A-:
• “- - - m”

Note

The laser is switched on at same time.

– Hold the -VAS6350/2- -2- flush against the catch bracket, as

shown, for the distance measurement.

• The -VAS6350/2A- must lie firmly against the catch bracket.

– Make sure the “laser beam” for the distance measurement
contacts the lower enlarged part of the measuring paddle
-1-.
If that is not the case, correct the measuring paddle height
using the locking nuts on the -VAS6350/1A-.

13. Blind Spot Detection 159

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Briefly press the ON button for distance measurement.

Display on the -VAS6350/2A-:

• “1,700 m” (specified value: 1700 ± 10 mm).
– Repeat the measurement procedure from the left catch
bracket to the measuring paddle on left rear wheel.
• The distance value must be the same on both sides.

cardiagn.com
If both measured values are not the same, adjust the -
VAS6350A- accordingly.

Note

The vehicle in the illustration is only a basic outline.

– Secure the -VAS6350/4- to the -VAS6350A- mount on the

rear left.
• When installed correctly, the vehicle electrical system volt‐
age wire must be connected at the bottom left of the calibra‐
tion device (as seen in direction of travel).
• Dimension -a- = 811 mm (measured from upper edge of
calibration device to workshop floor).
– The adjustment dimension is set with the test probe -arrow-
on the base of the calibration device on the scale of the steel
ruler -1-.

160 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

• Left adjustment dimension = 800 mm (read on measuring

scale -1-).
– Connect the -VAS6350/4- to the vehicle electrical system
voltage.
– Using the bubble level (level indicator) -arrow-, bring the
-VAS6350A- into a horizontal position by turning the plastic
bases.

cardiagn.com
– Wear “laser protective eyewear”.

Note

The vehicle in the illustration is only a basic outline.

– Turn on the -VAS6350/3A- on the -VAS6350A-.

– Align the entire -VAS6350A- so that the laser beam shines
on the center of the vehicle rear above the VW emblem.
– Check the distance on the left and right sides between the
catch brackets of the -VAS6350A- and the measuring pad‐
dles -1- on wheel mountings again.

13. Blind Spot Detection 161

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

• Specified value: 1700 ± 10 mm

Blind Spot Detection Control Module, Calibrating. Refer to ⇒
B13.4.3 lind Spot Detection Control ModuleJ1086 / Blind Spot
Detection Control Module 2J1087, Calibrating”, page 162 .

13.4.3 Blind Spot Detection Control Module -

J1086- / Blind Spot Detection Control
Module 2 -J1087-, Calibrating
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Calibration Unit -VAS6350A-
♦ Vehicle Diagnostic Tester

Note

Before starting the actual calibration procedure for the control

modules, the -VAS6350A- must be set up as described in the
chapter.

cardiagn.com
The following should not occur during the calibration procedure:
• Vehicle doors must not be opened or closed.
• People must not sit in the vehicle.
• People must not go between the vehicle and the -
VAS6350/4-.

Procedure:
– Turn on the -VAS6350/4- at the power switch -3-.

• The green LED -1- must turn on.

Note

If the red LED -2- turns on: check the -VAS6350/4-.

– Connect the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

– Select calibration in the “Guided Fault Finding” mode on the
Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.
– Follow the instructions in the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester dis‐
play.

162 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Note

The vehicle in the illustration is only a basic outline.

cardiagn.com
– Turn off the -VAS6350/4- and reposition the calibration tool.
During the program sequence, there is a prompt to switch the
-VAS6350/4- from the left to the right side of the -VAS6350A-.
• When installed correctly, the vehicle electrical system volt‐
age wire must be connected at the bottom left of the calibra‐
tion device (as seen in direction of travel).
• Dimension -a- = 811 mm (measured from upper edge of
calibration device to floor).
• Right adjustment dimension = 800 mm (read on measure‐
ment scale -1-).
– Turn on the -VAS6350/4- at the power switch -3-.

• The green LED -1- must turn on.

– Follow the instructions in the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester dis‐
play.
After successfully calibrating the blind spot detection, switch off
the ignition and disconnect the diagnostic connector.

13. Blind Spot Detection 163

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

14 Special Tools
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Release Lever - Wedge -T10039/1-

♦ Locking Pin (3 pc.) -T40011- or

cardiagn.com
♦ Suitable welding wire
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-

♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-

164 Rep. Gr.94 - Exterior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

♦ Calibration Unit -VAS6350A-

♦ Pry Lever -80-200-

cardiagn.com
♦ Power Fastener Extractor 7/16" -BET714-

14. Special Tools 165

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

96 – Interior Lights, Switches

cardiagn.com

166 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 Lamps
⇒ L1.1 ocation Overview - Instrument Panel Lamps”, page 168
⇒ L1.2 ocation Overview - Front Door Lamps”, page 168
⇒ L1.3 ocation Overview - Center Console Lamps”, page 169
⇒ L1.4 ocation Overview - Luggage Compartment Lamps”,
page 170
⇒ L1.5 ocation Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps”, page 171
⇒ G1.6 love Compartment LampW6, Removing and Installing”,
page 173
⇒ f1.7 or Glove Compartment LampW6, Replacing”, page 174
⇒ L1.8 eft Front Footwell LampK268/Right Front Footwell
LampK269, Removing and Installing”, page 175
⇒ L1.9 eft Front Footwell Illumination BulbL151/Right Front
Footwell Illumination BulbL152, Removing and Installing”, page
176
⇒ C1.10 entral Locking -Safe- Indicator LampK133, Removing
and Installing”, page 176

cardiagn.com
⇒ L1.11 eft Front Entry LampW31/Right Front Entry LampW32,
Removing and Installing”, page 177
⇒ L1.12 eft Front Entry LampW31/Right Front Entry LampW32,
Bulb Removing and Installing”, page 178
⇒ D1.13 river Door Warning LampW30/Front Passenger Door
Warning LampW36, Removing and Installing”, page 179
⇒ L1.14 eft Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 1L199/Right Front
Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 1L200, Removing and Installing”,
page 179
⇒ I1.15 nstrument Panel Contour Illumination Lamp 1L243, Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 179
⇒ I1.16 nstrument Panel Contour Illumination Lamp 2L244/In‐
strument Panel Contour Illumination Lamp 3L245, Removing
and Installing”, page 180
⇒ S1.17 elector Lever Transmission Range Position Display
UnitY26, Removing and Installing”, page 181
⇒ L1.18 uggage Compartment LampW3/Luggage Compartment
Lamp 2W115, Removing and Installing”, page 181
⇒ L1.19 uggage Compartment LampW3/Luggage Compartment
Lamp 2W115, Bulb Removing and Installing”, page 182
⇒ D1.20 river Vanity Mirror LampW20/Front Passenger Vanity
Mirror LampW14, Removing and Installing”, page 183
⇒ f1.21 or Front Interior LampW1, Removing and Installing”,
page 184
⇒ f1.22 or Rear Interior LampW43, Removing and Installing”,
page 186
⇒ I1.23 nterior LampW64 Bulb, Removing and Installing”, page
187
⇒ L1.24 eft Front Reading LampW65 and Right Front Reading
LampW66, Removing and Installing”, page 189
⇒ L1.25 eft Rear Reading LampW11/Right Rear Reading
LampW12, Removing and Installing”, page 189
⇒ L1.26 eft Rear Interior LampW47/Right Rear Interior
LampW48, Replacing”, page 189

1. Lamps 167
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1.1 Component Location Overview - Instrument Panel Lamps

1 - Instrument Panel Contour

Illumination Lamp 1 -L243-
❑ In the outer driver side
instrument panel
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
I1.15 nstrument Pan‐
el Contour Illumination
Lamp 1L243, Remov‐
ing and Installing”,
page 179 .
2 - Instrument Panel Contour
Illumination Lamp 2 -L244-/In‐
strument Panel Contour Illu‐
mination Lamp 3 -L245-
❑ Instrument Panel Con‐
tour Illumination Lamp
2 - L244- in the center
instrument panel

cardiagn.com
❑ Instrument Panel Con‐
tour Illumination Lamp
3 - L245- in the front
passenger side instru‐
ment panel
❑ Instrument Panel Con‐
tour Illumination Lamp
2 -L244- and Instru‐
ment Panel Contour
Illumination Lamp 3 -
L245- are integrated in
a shared component
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ I1.16 nstrument Panel Contour Illumination Lamp 2L244/Instrument Panel Contour
Illumination Lamp 3L245, Removing and Installing”, page 180 .
3 - Glove Compartment Lamp -W6-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ G1.6 love Compartment LampW6, Removing and Installing”, page
173 .
4 - Right Front Footwell Lamp -K269-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ L1.8 eft Front Footwell LampK268/Right Front Footwell
LampK269, Removing and Installing”, page 175 .
5 - Front Passenger Airbag -Disabled- Indicator Lamp -K145-
❑ Integrated in the Center Console Switch Module 1 -EX23-
❑ Center Console Switch Module 1 -EX23-, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ C2.12 enter Console
Switch Module 1EX23, Removing and Installing”, page 202 .
6 - Left Front Footwell Lamp -K268-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ L1.8 eft Front Footwell LampK268/Right Front Footwell
LampK269, Removing and Installing”, page 175 .

1.2 Component Location Overview - Front Door Lamps

168 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Central Locking -Safe- In‐

dicator Lamp -K133-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
C1.10 entral Lock‐
ing -Safe- Indicator
LampK133, Removing
and Installing”, page
176 .
2 - Left Front Door Ambient
Lighting Bulb 1 -L199-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
L1.14 eft Front Door
Ambient Lighting Bulb
1L199/Right Front Door
Ambient Lighting Bulb
1L200, Removing and
Installing”, page 179 .
3 - Right Front Door Ambient
Lighting Bulb 1 -L200-

cardiagn.com
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
L1.14 eft Front Door
Ambient Lighting Bulb
1L199/Right Front Door
Ambient Lighting Bulb
1L200, Removing and
Installing”, page 179 .
4 - Door Warning Lamp and
Entry Lamp
❑ Driver Door Warning
Lamp -W30- and Left
Front Entry Lamp -
W31-
❑ Front Passenger Door
Warning Lamp -W36-
and Right Front Entry Lamp -W32-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ L1.11 eft Front Entry LampW31/Right Front Entry LampW32,
Removing and Installing”, page 177 .

1.3 Component Location Overview - Center Console Lamps

1. Lamps 169
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Selector Lever Transmis‐

sion Range Position Display
Unit -Y26-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
S1.17 elector Lever
Transmission Range
Position Display Uni‐
tY26, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 181 .

cardiagn.com
1.4 Component Location Overview - Luggage Compartment Lamps

170 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Luggage Compartment
Lamp -W3-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
L1.18 uggage Com‐
partment LampW3/Lug‐
gage Compartment
Lamp 2W115, Remov‐
ing and Installing”,
page 181 .
2 - Luggage Compartment
Lamp 2 -W115-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
L1.18 uggage Com‐
partment LampW3/Lug‐
gage Compartment
Lamp 2W115, Remov‐
ing and Installing”,
page 181 .

cardiagn.com
1.5 Component Location Overview - Roof
Trim Panel Lamps
⇒ L1.5.1 ocation Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps, Vehicles
without Panorama Roof”, page 171
⇒ L1.5.2 ocation Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps, Vehicles
with Panorama Roof”, page 172

1.5.1 Component Location Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps, Vehicles with‐
out Panorama Roof

1. Lamps 171
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Driver Vanity Mirror Lamp

-W20-
❑ If the vanity mirror lamp
is equipped with LEDs,
the lamp must be re‐
placed if faulty.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
D1.20 river Vanity
Mirror LampW20/Front
Passenger Vanity Mir‐
ror LampW14, Remov‐
ing and Installing”,
page 183 .
2 - Rear Interior Lamp -WX2-
❑ With Left Rear Read‐
ing Lamp -W11- / Right
Rear Reading Lamp -
W12-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒

cardiagn.com
I2.35.1 nterior Lamp/
Reading Lamp, Remov‐
ing and Installing, Vehi‐
cles without Panorama
Roof”, page 215 .
❑ Bulb for Rear Interior
Lamp -W43-, Remov‐
ing and installing. Re‐
fer to ⇒ f1.22 or Rear
Interior LampW43, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 186 .
❑ Bulb for Left Rear Reading Lamp -W11-/Right Rear Reading Lamp -W12-, Removing and installing.
Refer to ⇒ L1.25 eft Rear Reading LampW11/Right Rear Reading LampW12, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 189 .
3 - Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp -W14-
❑ If the vanity mirror lamp is equipped with LEDs, the lamp must be replaced if faulty.
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ D1.20 river Vanity Mirror LampW20/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror
LampW14, Removing and Installing”, page 183 .
4 - Front Interior Lamp -WX1-
❑ With Left Front Reading Lamp -W65-/Right Front Reading Lamp -W66-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ I2.34 nterior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page
214 .
❑ Bulb for Front Interior Lamp -W1-, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ f1.21 or Front Interior LampW1,
Removing and Installing”, page 184 .
❑ Bulb for Left Front Reading Lamp -W65-/Right Front Reading Lamp -W66-, Removing and installing.
Refer to ⇒ L1.24 eft Front Reading LampW65 and Right Front Reading LampW66, Removing and
Installing”, page 189 .

1.5.2 Component Location Overview - Roof Trim Panel Lamps, Vehicles with
Panorama Roof

172 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Driver Vanity Mirror Lamp

-W20-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
D1.20 river Vanity
Mirror LampW20/Front
Passenger Vanity Mir‐
ror LampW14, Remov‐
ing and Installing”,
page 183 .
2 - Left Rear Interior Lamp -
W47-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
I2.35.2 nterior Lamp/
Reading Lamp, Remov‐
ing and Installing, Ve‐
hicles with Panorama
Roof”, page 217 .
❑ Bulb for Left
Rear Interior Lamp -

cardiagn.com
W47-. Refer to ⇒
L1.26 eft Rear Interior
LampW47/Right Rear
Interior LampW48, Re‐
placing”, page 189 .
3 - Right Rear Interior Lamp
-W48-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
I2.35.2 nterior Lamp/
Reading Lamp, Remov‐
ing and Installing, Vehicles with Panorama Roof”, page 217 .
❑ Bulb for Right Rear Interior Lamp -W48-. Refer to ⇒ L1.26 eft Rear Interior LampW47/Right Rear
Interior LampW48, Replacing”, page 189 .
4 - Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp -W14-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ D1.20 river Vanity Mirror LampW20/Front Passenger Vanity Mirror
LampW14, Removing and Installing”, page 183 .
5 - Front Interior Lamp -WX1-
❑ With Left Front Reading Lamp -W65-/Right Front Reading Lamp -W66-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ I2.34 nterior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page
214 .
❑ Bulb for Front Interior Lamp -W1-, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ f1.21 or Front Interior LampW1,
Removing and Installing”, page 184 .
❑ Bulb for Left Front Reading Lamp -W65-/Right Front Reading Lamp -W66-, Removing and installing.
Refer to ⇒ L1.24 eft Front Reading LampW65 and Right Front Reading LampW66, Removing and
Installing”, page 189 .

1.6 Glove Compartment Lamp -W6-, Re‐

moving and Installing
Removing
– Turn the light switch into neutral position.
– Push in the locking tab -1- using a flat-head screwdriver and
pry out the glove compartment lamp -2-.

1. Lamps 173
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release and disconnect the connector -3-.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

cardiagn.com
If the Glove Compartment Lamp -W6- is equipped with LEDs, it
must be replaced if faulty.

– Insert the glove compartment lamp into the opening and

engage on the opposite side.
– Perform a function test.

1.7 Bulb for Glove Compartment Lamp -

W6-, Replacing

Note

If the Glove Compartment Lamp -W6- is equipped with LEDs, it

must be replaced if faulty.

Removing
– Remove the Glove Compartment Lamp -W6-. Refer to ⇒
G1.6 love Compartment LampW6, Removing and Installing”,
page 173 .
– Pry out both sides of the heat shield -2- at the -arrows A-.

– Remove the heat shield -2- from the Glove Compartment

Lamp -W6- -1-.
– Remove the bulb -1- from the bulb socket -2- on the back of
the glove compartment lamp.

174 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

1.8 Left Front Footwell Lamp -K268-/Right

Front Footwell Lamp -K269-, Remov‐
ing and Installing

cardiagn.com
Note

The removal and installation of the Left Front Footwell Lamp

-K268- is described. The removal and installation of the Right
Front Footwell Lamp -K269- is similar.

Removing
– Release the tab -arrow- on the Left Front Footwell Lamp
-K268- -1- using a flat-head screwdriver.

– Pry out the footwell lamp -1-.

– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

For a footwell lamp the lamp must be replaced if there is a faulty

LED.

– Perform a function test.

1. Lamps 175
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1.9 Left Front Footwell Illumination Bulb -

L151-/Right Front Footwell Illumination
Bulb -L152-, Removing and Installing

Note

For a front footwell lamp the lamp must be replaced if there is a

faulty LED.

Removing
– Remove the Left Front Footwell Lamp -K268-/Right Front
Footwell Lamp -K269-. Refer to ⇒ L1.8 eft Front Footwell
LampK268/Right Front Footwell LampK269, Removing and
Installing”, page 175 .
– Pry out both sides of the heat shield -2- at the -A arrows-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the heat shield -2- from the footwell lamp -1-.
– Remove the bulb -1- on the back of the front footwell lamp
from the bulb socket -2-.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a function test.

1.10 Central Locking -Safe- Indicator Lamp

-K133-, Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70; Front Door Trim Panels; Front Door Trim Panel,
Removing and Installing.

176 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release and disconnect the connector.

– Release the retaining tabs on the Central Locking -Safe-
Indicator Lamp -K133- -2- by pressing -arrows-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the Central Locking -Safe- Indicator Lamp -K133-
-2- from the mount -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

1.11 Left Front Entry Lamp -W31-/Right

Front Entry Lamp -W32-, Removing
and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge -3409-

Note

The removal and installation of the Left Front Entry Lamp -W31-
is described. The removal and installation of the Right Front
Entry Lamp -W32- is similar.

Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially avail‐
able adhesive tape over the component in the visible
area.

– Pry out the entry lamp -1- carefully using the -3409- or a
screwdriver from the door trim panel -2-.

1. Lamps 177
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release and disconnect the connector on the entry lamp -1-.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

cardiagn.com
For a entry lamp with LED the lamp must be replaced if faulty.

– Perform a function test.

1.12 Left Front Entry Lamp -W31-/Right

Front Entry Lamp -W32-, Bulb Remov‐
ing and Installing

Note

For a entry lamp with LED the lamp must be replaced if faulty.

Removing
– Remove the entry lamp. Refer to ⇒ L1.11 eft Front Entry
LampW31/Right Front Entry LampW32, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 177 .
– Release the diffusion lens carefully out of the housing
-arrows-.

– Remove the bulb -1- upward in the direction of -arrow-

straight out of the socket.

178 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a function test.

1.13 Driver Door Warning Lamp -W30-/

Front Passenger Door Warning Lamp
-W36-, Removing and Installing

cardiagn.com
Note

The Driver Door Warning Lamp -W30-/Front Passenger Door

Warning Lamp -W36- and the Left Front Entry Lamp -W31-/
Right Front Entry Lamp -W32- are a single component. They
can be remove and installed together.

– Removing and installing the Left Front Entry Lamp -W31-/

Right Front Entry Lamp -W32-. Refer to ⇒ L1.11 eft Front
Entry LampW31/Right Front Entry LampW32, Removing and
Installing”, page 177 .

1.14 Left Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb

1 -L199-/Right Front Door Ambient
Lighting Bulb 1 -L200-, Removing and
Installing

Note

The Left Front Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 1 -L199-/Right Front

Door Ambient Lighting Bulb 1 -L200- is integrated in the deco‐
rative trim of the front door trim panel and cannot be replaced
separately.

– Front Door Trim Panel Decorative Trim, Removing and in‐

stalling. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70; Front Door
Trim Panels; Decorative Trim, Removing and Installing.

1.15 Instrument Panel Contour Illumination

Lamp 1 -L243-, Removing and Instal‐
ling
The Instrument Panel Contour Illumination Lamp 1 -L243- is
installed outside in the driver side instrument panel.

1. Lamps 179
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Removing
– Remove the Instrument Cluster -KX2-. Refer to ⇒ I1.2 nstru‐
ment ClusterKX2, Removing and Installing”, page 43 .
– Release and disconnect the connector -1- behind the Instru‐
ment Cluster -KX2-.

– Free up the wiring harness for the Instrument Panel Contour

Illumination Lamp 1 -L243- -2-.

cardiagn.com
– Unclip the Instrument Panel Contour Illumination Lamp 1
-L243- -2- carefully from the driver side instrument panel
cover -arrows-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

1.16 Instrument Panel Contour Illumination

Lamp 2 -L244-/Instrument Panel Con‐
tour Illumination Lamp 3 -L245-, Re‐
moving and Installing
The Instrument Panel Contour Illumination Lamp 2 -L244- and
Instrument Panel Contour Illumination Lamp 3 -L245- are inte‐
grated in a shared component. The Instrument Panel Contour
Illumination Lamp 2 - L244- is installed in the center instrument
panel and the Instrument Panel Contour Illumination Lamp 3 -
L245- is installed in the front passenger side instrument panel.
Removing
– Remove the Instrument Cluster -KX2-. Refer to ⇒ I1.2 nstru‐
ment ClusterKX2, Removing and Installing”, page 43 .
– Release and disconnect the connector -3- behind the Instru‐
ment Cluster -KX2-.

180 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Free up the wiring harness for the Instrument Panel Contour

cardiagn.com
Illumination Lamp 2 -L244- -2-.
– Release and disconnect the connector -4- behind the instru‐
ment panel.
– Free up the wiring harness for the Instrument Panel Contour
Illumination Lamp 3 -L245- -5-.
– Carefully unclip the Instrument Panel Contour Illumination
Lamp 2 -L244-/Instrument Panel Contour Illumination Lamp
3 -L245- -1- from the instrument panel -arrows-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

1.17 Selector Lever Transmission Range

Position Display Unit -Y26-, Removing
and Installing

Note

The Selector Lever Transmission Range Position Display Unit

-Y26- is integrated in the shift cover and cannot be replaced
individually.

– Removing and installing the selector lever handle with shift

cover. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 37; Selector Mechanism; Selector
Lever Handle, Removing and Installing.

1.18 Luggage Compartment Lamp -W3-/

Luggage Compartment Lamp 2 -
W115-, Removing and Installing

Note

The removal and installation is described for the left side. The
removal and installation on the right side is similar.

1. Lamps 181
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially avail‐
able adhesive tape over the component in the visible
area.

– Press in the locking tab -arrow- with a flat-head screwdriver.

cardiagn.com
– Pry out the luggage compartment lamp -1- from the luggage
compartment side trim panel.
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

1.19 Luggage Compartment Lamp -W3-/

Luggage Compartment Lamp 2 -
W115-, Bulb Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the Luggage Compartment Lamp -W3-/Luggage
Compartment Lamp 2 -W115-. Refer to ⇒ L1.18 ug‐
gage Compartment LampW3/Luggage Compartment Lamp
2W115, Removing and Installing”, page 181 .
– Pry out both sides of the heat shield -2- at the -A arrows-.

182 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the heat shield -2- from the footwell lamp -1-.
– Remove the bulb -1- on the back of the front footwell lamp
from the bulb socket -2-.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a function test.

cardiagn.com
1.20 Driver Vanity Mirror Lamp -W20-/Front
Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp -W14-,
Removing and Installing

Note

♦ Since the vanity mirror illumination is equipped with LEDs,

the lamp must be completely replaced if faulty.
♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side.
The removal and installation on the right side is similar.

Removing
– Pivot the sun visor forward.

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially avail‐
able adhesive tape over the component in the visible
area.

– Carefully pry out the vanity mirror lighting -1- at the opening
-arrow- using a flat-head screwdriver.

1. Lamps 183
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Disconnect the connector and remove the vanity mirror light‐

ing.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Insert the vanity mirror lighting into the opening and engage
it on the opposite side.

cardiagn.com
– Perform a function test.

1.21 Bulb for Front Interior Lamp -W1-, Re‐

moving and Installing
⇒ f1.21.1 or Front Interior LampW1, Removing and Installing,
with Bulbs”, page 184
⇒ f1.21.2 or Front Interior LampW1, Removing and Installing,
LED”, page 185

1.21.1 Bulb for Front Interior Lamp -W1-, Re‐

moving and Installing, with Bulbs
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge -3409-

Note

The bulb for the Front Interior Lamp -W1- and the bulb for
the Left Front Reading Lamp -W65-/Right Front Reading Lamp
-W66- are the same component.

Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially avail‐
able adhesive tape over the component in the visible
area.

– Using the -3409-, pry the diffusion lens from the Front Interi‐
or Lamp -W1- in the areas marked by -arrows-.

184 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the bulb -1- from the bulb holder in the direction of
-arrow A-.

cardiagn.com
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the bulb.

♦ Do not touch the lamp bulb glass with bare fingers. Fin‐
gers leave traces of grease on the bulb glass that will
evaporate and cloud the bulb glass when the lamp is
switched on.
♦ Use clean gloves, for example, to insert the bulbs.

– Perform a function test.

1.21.2 Bulb for Front Interior Lamp -W1-, Re‐

moving and Installing, LED
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge -3409-

Note

♦ The bulb for the Front Interior Lamp -W1- and the bulb for
the Left Front Reading Lamp -W65-/Right Front Reading
Lamp -W66- are the same component.
♦ If the Front Interior Lamp -W1- or Left Front Reading Lamp
-W65-/Right Front Reading Lamp -W66- is faulty, the diffu‐
sion lens must be replaced.

1. Lamps 185
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially avail‐
able adhesive tape over the component in the visible
area.

– Using the -3409-, pry the diffusion lens from the Front Interi‐
or Lamp -W1- in the areas marked by -arrows-.

cardiagn.com
– Release and disconnect the connectors.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
– Perform a function test.

1.22 Bulb for Rear Interior Lamp -W43-, Re‐

moving and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge -3409-

Note

The Rear Interior Lamp -W43- bulb and the Left Rear Reading
Lamp -W11- and Right Rear Reading Lamp -W12- bulb are one
component.

Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially avail‐
able adhesive tape over the component in the visible
area.

– Pry out the diffusion lens -3- for the Rear Interior Lamp
-W43- using the -3409-.

186 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the bulb -1- from the bulb socket -2- in the direction

cardiagn.com
of -arrow A-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the bulb.

♦ Do not touch the lamp bulb glass with bare fingers. Fin‐
gers leave traces of grease on the bulb glass that will
evaporate and cloud the bulb glass when the lamp is
switched on.
♦ Use clean gloves, for example, to insert the bulbs.

– Perform a function test.

1.23 Interior Lamp -W64- Bulb, Removing

and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge -3409-

Note

The bulb for the Interior Lamp - W64- and the bulbs for the
Left Third Row Reading Lamp -W94-/Right Third Row Reading
Lamp -W95- are the same component.

1. Lamps 187
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially avail‐
able adhesive tape over the component in the visible
area.

– Pry out the diffusion lens -3- for the Interior Lamp -W64-
using the -3409-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the bulb -1- from the bulb socket -2- in the direction
of -arrow A-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Caution

There is a risk of damaging the bulb.

♦ Do not touch the lamp bulb glass with bare fingers. Fin‐
gers leave traces of grease on the bulb glass that will
evaporate and cloud the bulb glass when the lamp is
switched on.
♦ Use clean gloves, for example, to insert the bulbs.

– Perform a function test.

188 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1.24 Left Front Reading Lamp -W65- and

Right Front Reading Lamp -W66-, Re‐
moving and Installing

Note

The bulb for the Left Front Reading Lamp -W65-/Right Front
Reading Lamp -W66- and the bulb for the Front Interior Lamp
-W1- are a single component.

– Bulb for Front Interior Lamp -W1-, Removing and installing.

Refer to ⇒ f1.21 or Front Interior LampW1, Removing and
Installing”, page 184 .

1.25 Left Rear Reading Lamp -W11-/Right

Rear Reading Lamp -W12-, Removing
and Installing

cardiagn.com
Note

The bulb for the Left Rear Reading Lamp -W11-/Right Rear
Reading Lamp -W12- and the bulb for the Rear Interior Lamp
-W43- are a single component.

– Bulb for Rear Interior Lamp -W43-, Removing and installing.

Refer to ⇒ f1.22 or Rear Interior LampW43, Removing and
Installing”, page 186 .

1.26 Left Rear Interior Lamp -W47-/Right

Rear Interior Lamp -W48-, Replacing

Note

The entire interior lamp must be replaced if there is a faulty bulb

in the Left Rear Interior Lamp -W47-/Right Rear Interior Lamp
-W48-.

– Rear Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and installing.

Refer to ⇒ I2.35.2 nterior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing
and Installing, Vehicles with Panorama Roof”, page 217 .

1. Lamps 189
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

cardiagn.com

190 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

2 Controls
⇒ L2.1 ocation Overview - Instrument Panel Controls”, page
192
⇒ L2.2 ocation Overview - Controls in Front Doors”, page 193
⇒ L2.3 ocation Overview - Controls in Rear Doors”, page 195
⇒ L2.4 ocation Overview - Controls in Center Console”, page
195
⇒ L2.5 ocation Overview - Controls in Luggage Compartment”,
page 197
⇒ L2.6 ocation Overview - Controls in Roof Trim Panel”, page
197
⇒ R2.7 otary Light SwitchEX1, Removing and Installing”, page
200
⇒ P2.8 arking Aid ButtonE266, Removing and Installing”, page
201
⇒ S2.9 teering Wheel Heating ButtonE522, Removing and In‐
stalling”, page 201

cardiagn.com
⇒ P2.10 arallel Parking Assistance ButtonE581, Removing and
Installing”, page 201
⇒ S2.11 tart/Stop Mode ButtonE693, Removing and Installing”,
page 201
⇒ C2.12 enter Console Switch Module 1EX23, Removing and
Installing”, page 202
⇒ C2.13 enter Console Switch Module 2EX30, Removing and
Installing”, page 202
⇒ D2.14 riving Profile Selection Control HeadE881, Removing
and Installing”, page 203
⇒ E2.15 mergency Flasher SwitchEX3, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 204
⇒ L2.16 eft Seat Heating ButtonE653/Right Seat Heating But‐
tonE654, Removing and Installing”, page 204
⇒ G2.17 love Compartment Lamp SwitchE26, Removing and
Installing”, page 204
⇒ E2.18 xterior Rearview Mirror AdjusterEX11, Removing and
Installing”, page 205
⇒ P2.19 ower Window Control Head in Driver DoorE512, Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 206
⇒ F2.20 ront Passenger Power Window ButtonE716, Removing
and Installing”, page 206
⇒ D2.21 river Interior Locking ButtonE308/Front Passenger In‐
terior Locking ButtonE309, Removing and Installing”, page 207
⇒ R2.22 ear Lid Remote Release ButtonE233, Removing and
Installing”, page 208
⇒ I2.23 nterior Monitoring and Vehicle Inclination Deactivation
ButtonE616, Removing and Installing”, page 208
⇒ D2.24 river Door Contact SwitchF2/Front Passenger Door
Contact SwitchF3, Removing and Installing”, page 209
⇒ D2.25 river Side Rear Power Window ButtonE711/Passenger
Side Rear Power Window ButtonE713, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 209

2. Controls 191
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

⇒ L2.26 eft Rear Door Contact SwitchF10/Right Rear Door

Contact SwitchF11, Removing and Installing”, page 210
⇒ E2.27 lectromechanical Parking Brake ButtonE538/-Auto
Hold- ButtonE540, Removing and Installing”, page 210
⇒ S2.28 tart System ButtonE378, Removing and Installing”,
page 211
⇒ R2.29 ear Lid Warning BuzzerH32, Removing and Installing”,
page 211
⇒ L2.30 id Contact Switch, Removing and Installing”, page 212
⇒ R2.31 ear Lid Lock Button in Luggage CompartmentE406,
Removing and Installing”, page 212
⇒ D2.32 river Vanity Mirror Lamp Contact SwitchF147/Front
Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp Contact SwitchF148, Removing
and Installing”, page 213
⇒ S2.33 unroof ButtonE325, Removing and Installing”, page
213
⇒ I2.34 nterior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”,
page 214

cardiagn.com
⇒ I2.35 nterior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”,
page 215
⇒ R2.36 ow Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 218
⇒ L2.37 eft Front Reading Lamp ButtonE633/Right Front Read‐
ing Lamp ButtonE634, Removing and Installing”, page 220
⇒ R2.38 oof Shade Button 1E584, Removing and Installing”,
page 220
⇒ G2.39 arage Door Opener Control HeadE284, Removing and
Installing”, page 221

2.1 Component Location Overview - Instrument Panel Controls

192 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Rotary Light Switch -EX1-

❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
R2.7 otary Light
SwitchEX1, Removing
and Installing”, page
200 .
2 - Left Seat Heating Button
-E653-
❑ Integrated in the Clima‐
tronic/A/C display con‐
trol head
❑ Cannot be replaced
separately if faulty.
❑ Display Control Head,
Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ Heating
Ventilation and Air Con‐
ditioning; Rep. Gr. 87;
Display Control Head;
Display Control Head,

cardiagn.com
Removing and Instal‐
ling.
3 - Right Seat Heating Button
-E654-
❑ Integrated in the Clima‐
tronic/A/C display con‐
trol head
❑ Cannot be replaced
separately if faulty.
❑ Display Control Head,
Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning; Rep. Gr. 87; Display
Control Head; Display Control Head, Removing and Installing.
4 - Glove Compartment Lamp Switch -E26-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ G2.17 love Compartment Lamp SwitchE26, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 204 .

2.2 Component Location Overview - Controls in Front Doors

2. Controls 193
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Driver Interior Locking But‐

ton -E308-
❑ Removing and in‐
stalling. Refer to
⇒ D2.21 river In‐
terior Locking But‐
tonE308/Front Passen‐
ger Interior Locking
ButtonE309, Removing
and Installing”, page
207 .
2 - Front Passenger Interior
Locking Button -E309-
❑ Removing and in‐
stalling. Refer to
⇒ D2.21 river In‐
terior Locking But‐
tonE308/Front Passen‐
ger Interior Locking
ButtonE309, Removing
and Installing”, page

cardiagn.com
207 .
3 - Front Passenger Power
Window Button -E716-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
F2.20 ront Passenger
Power Window But‐
tonE716, Removing
and Installing”, page
206 .
4 - Rear Lid Remote Release
Button -E233-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
R2.22 ear Lid Remote
Release ButtonE233,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 208 .
5 - Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster -EX11-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ E2.18 xterior Rearview Mirror AdjusterEX11, Removing and
Installing”, page 205 .
6 - Power Window Control Head in Driver Door -E512-
❑ With:
♦ Driver Power Window Button -E710-
♦ Front Passenger Power Window Button -E716-
♦ Driver Side Rear Power Window Button -E711-
♦ Passenger Side Rear Power Window Button -E713-
♦ Central Window Regulator Switch in Driver Door -E189-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ P2.19 ower Window Control Head in Driver DoorE512, Removing
and Installing”, page 206 .

Not Illustrated:
♦ Driver Door Contact Switch -F2- and Front Passenger Door
Contact Switch -F3-. Refer to ⇒ D2.24 river Door Contact

194 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

SwitchF2/Front Passenger Door Contact SwitchF3, Remov‐

ing and Installing”, page 209 .

2.3 Component Location Overview - Controls in Rear Doors

1 - Driver Side Rear Power

Window Button -E711-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
D2.25 river Side
Rear Power Window
ButtonE711/Passenger
Side Rear Power Win‐
dow ButtonE713, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 209 .
2 - Passenger Side Rear
Power Window Button -E713-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
D2.25 river Side
Rear Power Window

cardiagn.com
ButtonE711/Passenger
Side Rear Power Win‐
dow ButtonE713, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 209 .

Not Illustrated:
♦ Left Rear Door Contact Switch -F10- and Right Rear Door
Contact Switch -F11-. Refer to ⇒ L2.26 eft Rear Door Con‐
tact SwitchF10/Right Rear Door Contact SwitchF11, Remov‐
ing and Installing”, page 210 .

2.4 Component Location Overview - Controls in Center Console

2. Controls 195
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Steering Wheel Heating

Button -E522-
❑ Integrated in the Center
Console Switch Module
1 -EX23-
❑ Center Console Switch
Module 1 -EX23-, Re‐
moving and installing.
Refer to ⇒ C2.12 enter
Console Switch Module
1EX23, Removing and
Installing”, page 202 .
2 - Start/Stop Mode Button -
E693-
❑ Integrated in the Center
Console Switch Module
1 -EX23-
❑ Center Console Switch
Module 1 -EX23-, Re‐
moving and installing.
Refer to ⇒ C2.12 enter

cardiagn.com
Console Switch Module
1EX23, Removing and
Installing”, page 202 .
3 - Emergency Flasher Switch
-EX3-
❑ Integrated in the Center
Console Switch Module
1 -EX23-
❑ Center Console Switch
Module 1 -EX23-, Re‐
moving and installing.
Refer to ⇒ C2.12 enter
Console Switch Module
1EX23, Removing and
Installing”, page 202 .
4 - Driving Profile Selection
Control Head -E881-
❑ Only installed on AWD vehicles
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ D2.14 riving Profile Selection Control HeadE881, Removing and
Installing”, page 203 .
5 - Parallel Parking Assistance Button -E581-
❑ Integrated in the Center Console Switch Module 2 -EX30-
❑ Center Console Switch Module 2 -EX30-, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ C2.13 enter Console
Switch Module 2EX30, Removing and Installing”, page 202 .
6 - Parking Aid Button -E266-
❑ Integrated in the Center Console Switch Module 2 -EX30-
❑ Center Console Switch Module 2 -EX30-, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ C2.13 enter Console
Switch Module 2EX30, Removing and Installing”, page 202 .
7 - Electromechanical Parking Brake Button -E538- and -AUTO HOLD- Button -E540-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ E2.27 lectromechanical Parking Brake ButtonE538/-Auto Hold-
ButtonE540, Removing and Installing”, page 210 .
8 - Start System Button -E378-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ S2.28 tart System ButtonE378, Removing and Installing”, page
211 .

196 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

2.5 Component Location Overview - Controls in Luggage Compartment

1 - Rear Lid Warning Buzzer

-H32-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
R2.29 ear Lid Warning
BuzzerH32, Removing
and Installing”, page
211 .
2 - Rear Lid Contact Switch
❑ Rear Lid Alarm Switch
-F123-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ L2.30 id
Contact Switch, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 212 .
3 - Rear Lid Lock Button
in Luggage Compartment -

cardiagn.com
E406-
❑ Depending on vehicle
equipment with Locking
Mechanism Button in
the Rear Lid -E806-.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
R2.31 ear Lid Lock But‐
ton in Luggage Com‐
partmentE406, Remov‐
ing and Installing”,
page 212 .

2.6 Component Location Overview - Con‐

trols in Roof Trim Panel
⇒ L2.6.1 ocation Overview - Controls in Roof Trim Panel, Vehi‐
cles without Panorama Roof”, page 197
⇒ L2.6.2 ocation Overview - Controls in Roof Trim Panel, Vehi‐
cles with Panorama Roof”, page 198

2.6.1 Component Location Overview - Controls in Roof Trim Panel, Vehicles

without Panorama Roof

2. Controls 197
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Driver Vanity Mirror Lamp

Contact Switch -F147-
❑ The vanity mirror con‐
tact switch is located
in the sun visor mount
and cannot be replaced
separately if faulty.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
D2.32 river Vanity
Mirror Lamp Contact
SwitchF147/Front Pas‐
senger Vanity Mir‐
ror Lamp Contact
SwitchF148, Removing
and Installing”, page
213 .
2 - Left Rear Reading Lamp
Switch -E454-/Right Rear
Reading Lamp Switch -E455-
❑ Installed in the Rear In‐

cardiagn.com
terior Lamp -WX2-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
I2.35 nterior Lamp/
Reading Lamp, Remov‐
ing and Installing”,
page 215 .
3 - Front Passenger Vanity
Mirror Lamp Contact Switch -
F148-
❑ The vanity mirror con‐
tact switch is located in the sun visor mount and cannot be replaced separately if faulty.
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ D2.32 river Vanity Mirror Lamp Contact SwitchF147/Front Pas‐
senger Vanity Mirror Lamp Contact SwitchF148, Removing and Installing”, page 213 .
4 - Rear Interior Lamp Button -E327-
❑ Installed in the Front Interior Lamp -WX1-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ L2.37 eft Front Reading Lamp ButtonE633/Right Front Reading
Lamp ButtonE634, Removing and Installing”, page 220 .
5 - Right Front Reading Lamp Button -E634-
❑ Installed in the Front Interior Lamp -WX1-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ L2.37 eft Front Reading Lamp ButtonE633/Right Front Reading
Lamp ButtonE634, Removing and Installing”, page 220 .
6 - Left Front Reading Lamp Button -E633-
❑ Installed in the Front Interior Lamp -WX1-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ I2.34 nterior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page
214 .
7 - Button for Door Opener Illumination
❑ Installed in the Front Interior Lamp -WX1-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ I2.34 nterior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page
214 .

2.6.2 Component Location Overview - Controls in Roof Trim Panel, Vehicles

with Panorama Roof

198 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Driver Vanity Mirror Lamp

Contact Switch -F147-
❑ The vanity mirror con‐
tact switch is located
in the sun visor mount
and cannot be replaced
separately if faulty.
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
D2.32 river Vanity
Mirror Lamp Contact
SwitchF147/Front Pas‐
senger Vanity Mir‐
ror Lamp Contact
SwitchF148, Removing
and Installing”, page
213 .
2 - Left Rear Reading Lamp
Switch -E454-
❑ Installed in the Left
Rear Interior Lamp -

cardiagn.com
W47-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
I2.35.2 nterior Lamp/
Reading Lamp, Remov‐
ing and Installing, Ve‐
hicles with Panorama
Roof”, page 217 .
3 - Right Rear Reading Lamp
Switch -E455-
❑ Installed in the Left
Rear Interior Lamp -W47-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ I2.35.2 nterior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing,
Vehicles with Panorama Roof”, page 217 .
4 - Button in the Garage Door Opener Control Head -E284-
❑ Garage Door Opener Control Head -E284-, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ G2.39 arage Door
Opener Control HeadE284, Removing and Installing”, page 221 .
5 - Roof Shade Button 1 -E584-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ R2.38 oof Shade Button 1E584, Removing and Installing”, page
220 .
6 - Rear Interior Lamp Button -E327-
❑ Installed in the Front Interior Lamp -WX1-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ I2.34 nterior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page
214 .
7 - Right Front Reading Lamp Button -E634-
❑ Installed in the Front Interior Lamp -WX1-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ L2.37 eft Front Reading Lamp ButtonE633/Right Front Reading
Lamp ButtonE634, Removing and Installing”, page 220 .
8 - Sunroof Button -E325-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ S2.33 unroof ButtonE325, Removing and Installing”, page 213 .
9 - Left Front Reading Lamp Button -E633-
❑ Installed in the Front Interior Lamp -WX1-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ I2.34 nterior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page
214 .
10 - Button for Door Opener Illumination

2. Controls 199
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020
❑ Installed in the Front Interior Lamp -WX1-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ I2.34 nterior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page
214 .
11 - Front Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp Contact Switch -F148-
❑ The vanity mirror contact switch is located in the sun visor mount and cannot be replaced separately if
faulty.
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ D2.32 river Vanity Mirror Lamp Contact SwitchF147/Front Pas‐
senger Vanity Mirror Lamp Contact SwitchF148, Removing and Installing”, page 213 .

2.7 Rotary Light Switch -EX1-, Removing

and Installing

Note

The removal or installation for LHD is described. The removal or

installation for RHD is similar.

Removing

cardiagn.com
– Turn the light switch into neutral position.
– Push the rotary handle -1- in the direction of -arrow A-.

– Turn the rotary handle -1- in the direction of -arrow B-.

– Hold the rotary handle -1- in this position.
– Remove the Rotary Light Switch -EX1- from the instrument
panel in the direction of -arrow C-.
– Release and disconnect the connectors -arrow A-.

– Remove the Rotary Light Switch -EX1- -1-.

200 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

2.8 Parking Aid Button -E266-, Removing

and Installing

Note

The Parking Aid Button -E266- is integrated in the Center Con‐

sole Switch Module 2 -EX30- and cannot be replaced separate‐
ly.

– Center Console Switch Module 2 -EX30-, Removing and

installing. Refer to ⇒ C2.13 enter Console Switch Module
2EX30, Removing and Installing”, page 202 .

2.9 Steering Wheel Heating Button -E522-,

Removing and Installing

cardiagn.com
Note

The Steering Wheel Heating Button -E522- is integrated in

the Center Console Switch Module 1 -EX23- and cannot be
replaced separately.

– Center Console Switch Module 1 -EX23-, Removing and

installing. Refer to ⇒ C2.12 enter Console Switch Module
1EX23, Removing and Installing”, page 202 .

2.10 Parallel Parking Assistance Button -

E581-, Removing and Installing

Note

The Parallel Parking Assistance Button -E581- is integrated in

the Center Console Switch Module 2 -EX30- and cannot be
replaced separately.

– Center Console Switch Module 2 -EX30-, Removing and

installing. Refer to ⇒ C2.13 enter Console Switch Module
2EX30, Removing and Installing”, page 202 .

2.11 Start/Stop Mode Button -E693-, Re‐

moving and Installing

Note

The Start/Stop Mode Button -E693- is integrated in the Center

Console Switch Module 1 -EX23- and cannot be replaced sepa‐
rately.

– Center Console Switch Module 1 -EX23-, Removing and

installing. Refer to ⇒ C2.12 enter Console Switch Module
1EX23, Removing and Installing”, page 202 .

2. Controls 201
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

2.12 Center Console Switch Module 1 -

EX23-, Removing and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-
The individual buttons are installed in the Center Console
Switch Module 1 -EX23- and cannot be replaced separately.
Depending on the equipment the following button can be instal‐
led:
♦ Emergency Flasher Switch -EX3-
♦ Steering Wheel Heating Button -E522-
♦ Start/Stop Mode Button -E693-
Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent
switching on the ignition unintentionally.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the display control head trim. Refer to ⇒ Body In‐
terior; Rep. Gr. 68; Center Console; Display Control Head
Trim, Removing and Installing.
– Remove the screws -arrows-.

– Remove the Center Console Switch Module 1 -EX23- -1-

from the display control head trim.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

2.13 Center Console Switch Module 2 -

EX30-, Removing and Installing
The individual buttons are installed in the Center Console
Switch Module 2 -EX30- and cannot be replaced separately.
Depending on the equipment the following button can be instal‐
led:
♦ Parking Aid Button -E266-
♦ Parallel Parking Assistance Button -E581-
Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.

202 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent

switching on the ignition unintentionally.
– Remove the selector lever handle with shift cover. Refer to
⇒ Rep. Gr. 37; Selector Mechanism; Selector Lever Handle,
Removing and Installing.
– Push together the catches -arrows- on the Center Console
Switch Module 2 -EX30- -1-.

cardiagn.com
– At the same time remove the Center Console Switch Module
2 -EX30- -1- from the shift cover.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

2.14 Driving Profile Selection Control Head

-E881-, Removing and Installing
Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent
switching on the ignition unintentionally.
– Remove the selector lever handle with shift cover. Refer to
⇒ Rep. Gr. 37; Selector Mechanism; Selector Lever Handle,
Removing and Installing.
– Release the catches from the Driving Profile Selection Con‐
trol Head -E881- -1- in the direction of -arrow A-.

– At the same time turn the Driving Profile Selection Control

Head -E881- -1- all the way in the direction of -arrow B-.
– Remove the Driving Profile Selection Control Head -E881-
-1- from the shift cover.

2. Controls 203
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

2.15 Emergency Flasher Switch -EX3-, Re‐

moving and Installing

Note

The Emergency Flasher Switch -EX3- is integrated in the Cen‐

ter Console Switch Module 1 -EX23- and cannot be replaced
separately.

– Center Console Switch Module 1 -EX23-, Removing and

installing. Refer to ⇒ C2.12 enter Console Switch Module
1EX23, Removing and Installing”, page 202 .

2.16 Left Seat Heating Button -E653-/Right

Seat Heating Button -E654-, Removing

cardiagn.com
and Installing

Note

The Left Seat Heating Button -E653-/Right Seat Heating Button

-E654- are integrated in the A/C display control head/Climatron‐
ic and cannot be replace separately if faulty.

– A/C/Climatronic Display Control Head, Removing and instal‐

ling. Refer to ⇒ Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning;
Rep. Gr. 87; Display Control Head; Display Control Head,
Removing and Installing.

2.17 Glove Compartment Lamp Switch -

E26-, Removing and Installing

Note

The removal or installation for LHD is described. The removal or

installation for RHD is similar.

Removing
– Open the glove compartment lid -2-.

204 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Push the stop -1- for the glove compartment lid -2- upward in
direction of -A arrows-.
– At the same time, open the glove compartment lid -2- further
in direction of -arrow B-. While doing so, carefully remove
the damping element shaft from the damper.
– Release and disconnect the connector -2- from the Glove
Compartment Lamp Switch -E26- -3-.

cardiagn.com
– Turn the damper -1- with the Glove Compartment Lamp
Switch -E26- -3- 90° (1/4 turn) in the direction of -arrow- and
remove from the glove compartment.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

If the damping element falls out of the damper, then place the
damping element in the correct installation position in the damp‐
er.

Caution

Carefully install the shaft in the damper in the correct installa‐

tion position.

– Perform a function test.

2.18 Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjuster -

EX11-, Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70; Front Door Trim Panels; Front Door Trim Panel,
Removing and Installing.
– Carefully release the retaining tab -2- on the button trim -3-
in the direction of -arrow- using a small screwdriver.

2. Controls 205
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– At the same time remove the Exterior Rearview Mirror Ad‐

juster -EX11- -1- from the button trim -3-.
– Release and disconnect the connector -4-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

cardiagn.com
2.19 Power Window Control Head in Driver
Door -E512-, Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the button trim from the front door trim panel. Refer
to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70; Front Door Trim Panel;
Button Trim, Removing and Installing.
– Release the catches -1- on both sides using a small screw‐
driver.

– Remove the Power Window Control Head in Driver Door

-E512- -2- in the direction of -arrow- from the button trim -3-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

2.20 Front Passenger Power Window But‐

ton -E716-, Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the button trim from the front door trim panel. Refer
to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70; Front Door Trim Panel;
Button Trim, Removing and Installing.

206 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release the catches -2- on both sides using a small screw‐

driver.

– Remove the Front Passenger Power Window Button -E716-

-3- from the button trim -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

cardiagn.com
– Perform a function test.

2.21 Driver Interior Locking Button -E308-/

Front Passenger Interior Locking But‐
ton -E309-, Removing and Installing

Note

The removal and installation for the Driver Interior Locking But‐
ton -E308- is described. The removal and installation for the
Front Passenger Interior Locking Button -E309- is similar.

Removing
– Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70; Front Door Trim Panels; Front Door Trim Panel,
Removing and Installing.
– Release and disconnect the connector -1-.

– Open the clips in the direction of -arrows-.

– Remove the Driver Interior Locking Button -E308- -2- out‐
ward.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

2. Controls 207
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Perform a function test.

2.22 Rear Lid Remote Release Button -

E233-, Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the front door trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 70; Front Door Trim Panels; Front Door Trim Panel,
Removing and Installing.

Note

For reasons of clarity, the front door trim panel is not illustrated.

cardiagn.com
– Release the catches -2- on both sides using a small screw‐
driver.
– Remove the Rear Lid Remote Release Button -E233- -3-
from the trim -1-.
– Release and disconnect the connector on the Rear Lid Re‐
mote Release Button -E233- -3-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

2.23 Interior Monitoring and Vehicle Inclina‐

tion Deactivation Button -E616-, Re‐
moving and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge -3409-
Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially avail‐
able adhesive tape over the component in the visible
area.

– Pry out the Interior Monitoring and Vehicle Inclination Deac‐

tivation Button -E616- -1- using the -VAS3409- or a screw‐
driver at the lower edge.

208 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the button from the B-pillar trim panel.

cardiagn.com
– Release and disconnect the connector -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

2.24 Driver Door Contact Switch -F2-/Front

Passenger Door Contact Switch -F3-,
Removing and Installing

Note

The Driver Door Contact Switch -F2-/Front Passenger Door

Contact Switch -F3- is integrated in the door lock and cannot
be replaced separately if faulty.

– Front Door Lock, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body

Exterior; Rep. Gr. 57; Door Components; Door Lock, Re‐
moving and Installing.

2.25 Driver Side Rear Power Window But‐

ton -E711-/Passenger Side Rear Pow‐
er Window Button -E713-, Removing
and Installing

Note

The removal and installation for the Driver Side Rear Power
Window Button -E711- is described. The removal and installa‐
tion for the Passenger Side Rear Power Window Button -E713-
is similar.

Removing
– Remove the button trim from the rear door trim panel. Refer
to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70; Rear Door Trim Panel; But‐
ton Trim, Removing and Installing.

2. Controls 209
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release the catches -2- on both sides using a small screw‐

driver.

– Remove the Driver Side Rear Power Window Button -E711-

-3- from the button trim -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

cardiagn.com
– Perform a function test.

2.26 Left Rear Door Contact Switch -F10-/

Right Rear Door Contact Switch -F11-,
Removing and Installing

Note

The Left Rear Door Contact Switch -F10-/Right Rear Door Con‐
tact Switch -F11- is integrated in the door contact switch and
can be replaced separately if faulty.

– Rear Door Lock, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body

Exterior; Rep. Gr. 58; Door Components; Door Lock, Re‐
moving and Installing.

2.27 Electromechanical Parking Brake But‐

ton -E538-/-Auto Hold- Button -E540-,
Removing and Installing

Note

The Electromechanical Parking Brake Button -E538- and the

-AUTO HOLD- Button -E540- are one component and cannot
be separated.

Removing
– Remove the selector lever handle with shift cover. Refer to
⇒ Rep. Gr. 37; Selector Mechanism; Selector Lever Handle,
Removing and Installing.
– Release the retaining tab from the shift cover -2- in the direc‐
tion of -arrow-.

210 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the Electromechanical Parking Brake Button -E538-

-1- upward from the shift cover -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

2.28 Start System Button -E378-, Removing

cardiagn.com
and Installing
Removing
– Remove the selector lever handle with shift cover. Refer to
⇒ Rep. Gr. 37; Selector Mechanism; Selector Lever Handle,
Removing and Installing.
– Release the clip on the Start System Button -E378- -1- in the
direction of -arrow-.

– Remove the Start System Button -E378- -1- upward from the
shift cover.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

2.29 Rear Lid Warning Buzzer -H32-, Re‐

moving and Installing
Removing
– Remove the rear lid lower trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interi‐
or; Rep. Gr. 70; Luggage Compartment Trim Panels; Rear
Lid Lower Trim Panel, Removing and Installing.
– Pry out the expanding rivets -2-.

2. Controls 211
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the Rear Lid Warning Buzzer -H32- -3-.

– Release and disconnect the connector -1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

2.30 Rear Lid Contact Switch, Removing

cardiagn.com
and Installing

Note

The rear lid contact switch is integrated in the rear lid latch and
cannot be replaced separately.

– Rear Lid Latch, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body

Exterior; Rep. Gr. 55; Rear Lid; Latch, Removing and Instal‐
ling.

2.31 Rear Lid Lock Button in Luggage Com‐

partment -E406-, Removing and Instal‐
ling
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Wedge Set -T10383-
Depending on vehicle equipment the Locking Mechanism But‐
ton in The Rear Lid -E806- can be additionally installed. If this
is the case the Rear Lid Lock Button in Luggage Compartment
-E406- and the Locking Mechanism Button in The Rear Lid
-E806- are combined in a shared component.
Removing

Caution

Risk of damaging the component surfaces.

♦ When positioning a prying tool, put commercially avail‐
able adhesive tape over the component in the visible
area.

– Release the catches in direction of -arrows- on the Rear Lid

Lock Button in Luggage Compartment -E406- -2- using the
-T10383/1-.

212 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the Rear Lid Lock Button in Luggage Compartment

cardiagn.com
-E406- -2- from the rear lid lower trim panel.
– Release and disconnect the connector -1-.
If the Rear Lid Lock Button in Luggage Compartment -E406-
cannot be removed as described, then:
– Remove the rear lid lower trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interi‐
or; Rep. Gr. 70; Luggage Compartment Trim Panels; Rear
Lid Lower Trim Panel, Removing and Installing.
– Unclip the Rear Lid Lock Button in Luggage Compartment
-E406- from the rear lid lower trim panel from the inside.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

2.32 Driver Vanity Mirror Lamp Contact

Switch -F147-/Front Passenger Vanity
Mirror Lamp Contact Switch -F148-,
Removing and Installing

Note

The Driver Vanity Mirror Lamp Contact Switch -F147-/Front

Passenger Vanity Mirror Lamp Contact Switch -F148- is integra‐
ted in the sun visor mount and cannot be replaced separately if
faulty.

– Sun Visor, Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;

Rep. Gr. 68; Vehicle Equipment; Sun Visor, Removing and
Installing.

2.33 Sunroof Button -E325-, Removing and

Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-

2. Controls 213
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Removing
– Remove the Front Interior Lamp -WX1-. Refer to ⇒ I2.34 nte‐
rior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page
214 .
– Remove the screws -arrows-.

– Remove the Sunroof Button -E325- -1- from the Front Interi‐
or Lamp -WX1-.

cardiagn.com
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.
Tightening Specifications
Component Tightening Specification
Sunroof Button -E325- on the 1 Nm
Front Interior Lamp -WX1-

2.34 Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp,

Removing and Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Trim Removal Wedge -3409-

Note

The switch module is a component of the Front Interior Lamp

-WX1- and cannot be removed separately.

Removing
– Using the -3409-, pry the diffusion lens off the Front Interior
Lamp -WX1- in the areas marked by -arrows-.

214 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– If equipped, release and disconnect the connectors.

– Push the catches in the direction of -arrow A- and remove
the Front Interior Lamp -WX1-.

– Release and disconnect the connectors.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

cardiagn.com
– Perform a function test.

2.35 Rear Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Re‐

moving and Installing
⇒ I2.35.1 nterior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing,
Vehicles without Panorama Roof”, page 215
⇒ I2.35.2 nterior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing,
Vehicles with Panorama Roof”, page 217

2.35.1 Rear Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Re‐

moving and Installing, Vehicles without
Panorama Roof
Removing

Note

♦ The buttons are a permanent component of the Rear Interior

Lamp -WX2- and cannot be removed separately.
♦ The Rear Interior Lamp -WX2- is held in place by a dual-
stage locking mechanism.

– Pry out the diffusion lens -1- in the direction of -arrow A-

using a narrow screwdriver, for example.

2. Controls 215
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the diffusion lens -1- from the Rear Interior Lamp
-WX2- -2-.
– Release the catches -2- in the direction of -arrow A- using a
narrow screwdriver, for example.

– Push the locking mechanism -1- in the direction of -arrow B-.

– Remove the Rear Interior Lamp -WX2- -1- out of the roof
opening in the direction of -arrow A-.

cardiagn.com
– Release the connector lock in the direction of -arrow B- and
disconnect the connector in the direction of -arrow C-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

The connector must point in the direction of travel.

– Push the locking mechanism -1- opposite the direction of

-arrow B-. The catches -2- must engage securely.

216 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Perform a function test.

2.35.2 Rear Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Re‐

moving and Installing, Vehicles with
Panorama Roof
Special tools and workshop equipment required

cardiagn.com
♦ Trim Removal Wedge -3409-

Note

♦ The buttons are a permanent component of the Left Rear

Interior Lamp -W47-/Right Rear Interior Lamp -W48- and
cannot be removed separately.
♦ The removal and installation is described for the left side.
The removal and installation on the right side is similar.

Removing
– Remove the headliner. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70;
Roof Trim Panels; Headliner, Removing and Installing.
– Handle the headliner carefully and lay it on a clean surface.
– Press the catches -1- and pivot the interior lamp out of the
holder -2-.

– If necessary, also pry the lamp -1- out of the holder -arrow-
using the -3409-.

2. Controls 217
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Using the -3409-, remove the interior lamp -1- from the hold‐
er -2- at the pivot points -arrow- on both sides of the lamp.

cardiagn.com
– Release and disconnect the connector on the interior lamp
-1-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.

2.36 Third Row Interior Lamp/Reading

Lamp, Removing and Installing
Removing

Note

♦ The buttons are a permanent component of the Interior

Lamp -W64- and cannot be removed separately.
♦ The Interior Lamp -W64- is held in place by a dual-stage
locking mechanism.

– Pry out the diffusion lens -1- in the direction of -arrow A-

using a narrow screwdriver, for example.

218 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the diffusion lens -1- from the Interior Lamp -W64-
-2-.
– Release the catches -2- in the direction of -arrow A- using a
narrow screwdriver, for example.

cardiagn.com
– Push the locking mechanism -1- in the direction of -arrow B-.
– Remove the Interior Lamp -W64- -1- out of the roof opening
in the direction of -arrow A-.

– Release the connector lock in the direction of -arrow B- and

disconnect the connector in the direction of -arrow C-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

2. Controls 219
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

Note

The connector must point in the direction of travel.

– Push the locking mechanism -1- opposite the direction of

-arrow B-. The catches -2- must engage securely.

cardiagn.com
– Perform a function test.

2.37 Left Front Reading Lamp Button -

E633-/Right Front Reading Lamp But‐
ton -E634-, Removing and Installing

Note

The Left Front Reading Lamp Button -E633-/Right Front Read‐

ing Lamp Button -E634- is a component of the interior lamp/
reading lamp and cannot be replaced separately.

– Front Interior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and installing.

Refer to ⇒ I2.34 nterior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and
Installing”, page 214 .

2.38 Roof Shade Button 1 -E584-, Remov‐

ing and Installing
The Roof Shade Button 1 -E584- is located in the headliner
compartment.
Removing
– Remove the Front Interior Lamp -WX1-. Refer to ⇒ I2.34 nte‐
rior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page
214 .
– Remove the headliner storage compartment. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68; Storage Compartments/Cov‐
ers; Headliner Storage Compartment, Removing and Instal‐
ling.
– Release the retainers -A arrows- on the trim -1-.

220 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the trim -1- downward from the headliner compart‐

cardiagn.com
ment.
– Release the catches -3- on the headliner compartment.
– Remove the Roof Shade Button 1 -E584- -2- downward from
the headliner compartment.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

2.39 Garage Door Opener Control Head -

E284-, Removing and Installing

Note

Depending on vehicle equipment the installation position of the

Garage Door Opener Control Head -E284- can differ slightly.
The removal and installation is identical on all equipment ver‐
sions.

Removing
– Remove the Front Interior Lamp -WX1-. Refer to ⇒ I2.34 nte‐
rior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page
214 .
– Remove the headliner storage compartment. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68; Storage Compartments/Cov‐
ers; Headliner Storage Compartment, Removing and Instal‐
ling.
– Carefully release the mounting tabs -2- on both sides on the
headliner compartment using a small screwdriver.

2. Controls 221
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– At the same time remove the Garage Door Opener Control

Head -E284- -1- upward from the headliner compartment.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

cardiagn.com

222 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

3 Anti-Theft Alarm System

⇒ -3.1 Interior Monitoring”, page 223
⇒ A3.2 larm HornH12, Removing and Installing”, page 223
⇒ A3.3 nti-Theft Alarm System SensorG578, Removing and
Installing”, page 224

3.1 Overview - Interior Monitoring

1 - Alarm Horn -H12-

❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
A3.2 larm HornH12,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 223 .
2 - Anti-Theft Alarm System
Sensor -G578-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒

cardiagn.com
A3.3 nti-Theft Alarm
System SensorG578,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 224 .
❑ Must be parameterized
after replacing. Refer to
⇒ A3.3 nti-Theft Alarm
System SensorG578,
Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 224 .
3 - Interior Monitoring and Ve‐
hicle Inclination Deactivation
Button -E616-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
I2.23 nterior Monitor‐
ing and Vehicle In‐
clination Deactivation
ButtonE616, Removing
and Installing”, page
208 .
4 - Vehicle Electrical System Control Module -J519-
❑ With Central Locking and Anti-Theft Alarm System Antenna -R47-
❑ Component Location Overview. Refer to ⇒ L2.1 ocation Overview - Control Modules”, page 240 .
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ V2.2 ehicle Electrical System Control ModuleJ519, Removing and
Installing”, page 241 .

3.2 Alarm Horn -H12-, Removing and In‐

stalling
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-
Removing
– Remove the right plenum chamber cover. Refer to ⇒ Body
Exterior; Rep. Gr. 50; Bulkhead; Plenum Chamber Cover,
Removing and Installing.
– Remove the nuts -3-.

3. Anti-Theft Alarm System 223

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the Alarm Horn -H12- -1- with the bracket -2- from

cardiagn.com
the plenum chamber.
– Release and disconnect the connector -5-.
– Remove the nut -4-.
– Remove the Alarm Horn -H12- -1- from the bracket -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Perform a function test.
Tightening Specifications
Component Tightening Specification
Alarm Horn -H12- to the brack‐ 18 Nm
et
Bracket to body 9 Nm

3.3 Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor -

G578-, Removing and Installing
Removing
– Remove the Front Interior Lamp -WX1-. Refer to ⇒ I2.34 nte‐
rior Lamp/Reading Lamp, Removing and Installing”, page
214 .
– Remove the headliner storage compartment. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68; Storage Compartments/Cov‐
ers; Headliner Storage Compartment, Removing and Instal‐
ling.
– Release the mounting tabs in the direction of -arrow A- and
the direction of -arrow B-.

224 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor -G578- -1-

from the headliner storage compartment.
– Remove the three individual sensors one after the other from
the headliner storage compartment as follows.
– Release the mounting tabs in the direction of -arrow A- and
the direction of -arrow B-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the individual sensor -1- from the headliner storage
compartment.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:

Note

If the Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor -G578- is being replaced,

then it must be parameterized.

– Parameterize the Anti-Theft Alarm System Sensor -G578-

using the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

3. Anti-Theft Alarm System 225

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

4 Driver Assistance Systems Front

Camera
⇒ A4.1 ssistance Systems Front Camera, Removing and Instal‐
ling”, page 226

4.1 Driver Assistance Systems Front Cam‐

era, Removing and Installing
Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent the
ignition from switching on unintentionally.
– Remove the mirror base cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior;
Rep. Gr. 68; Interior Rearview Mirror; Overview - Interior
Rearview Mirror.
– Unclip the Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera -R242-
-2- from the retainers -1- in the direction of -arrow A-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera -
R242- -2- from the holder in the direction of -arrow B-.
– Release and disconnect the connector -3-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Calibrate the Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera -
R242-. Refer to ⇒ Suspension, Wheels, Steering; Rep.
Gr. 44; Driver Assistance Systems Front Camera; Driver As‐
sistance Systems Front Camera, Calibrating.

226 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

5 Cigarette Lighter and Socket

⇒ C5.1 igarette LighterU1, Removing and Installing”, page 227
⇒ S5.2 ocket Illumination BulbL42, Removing and Installing”,
page 227
⇒ R5.3 ear Cigarette Lighter Illumination BulbL32, Removing
and Installing”, page 227
⇒ S5.4 ocketU, Removing and Installing”, page 227
⇒ w5.5 ith Socket, Removing and Installing”, page 227

5.1 Cigarette Lighter -U1-, Removing and

Installing
Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep.
Gr. 96; Cigarette Lighter -U1- .

5.2 Socket Illumination Bulb -L42-, Remov‐

ing and Installing
Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep.

cardiagn.com
Gr. 96; 12-V-Socket .

5.3 Rear Cigarette Lighter Illumination

Bulb -L32-, Removing and Installing
Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep.
Gr. 96; Cigarette Lighter -U1- .

5.4 Socket -U-, Removing and Installing

Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep.
Gr. 96; 12 V Socket; 12 V Socket, Removing and Installing.

5.5 Converter with Socket, Removing and

Installing
The converter with socket is installed under the rear center
console on the center tunnel.

WARNING

There is a danger of electric shock.

♦ The converter with socket housing contains capacitors
that can be charged with residual voltage.
♦ The converter with socket housing must not be opened
under any circumstances.
♦ No repairs may be performed on the connector, on the
wires and the socket.
♦ If there is a fault at the connector, at the wires, at the
socket or in the converter, the entire unit must always be
replaced.

Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent the
ignition from switching on unintentionally.

5. Cigarette Lighter and Socket 227

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the center console rear trim. Refer to ⇒ Body Interi‐

or; Rep. Gr. 68; Center Console; Center Console Rear Trim,
Removing and Installing.
– Release and disconnect the connector -1-.

– Remove the converter with socket -2- in the direction of

-arrow- from the tabs on the body.
– Guide out the converter with socket -2- rearward from the

cardiagn.com
center console.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

228 Rep. Gr.96 - Interior Lights, Switches

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

6 Special Tools
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Wedge Set -T10383-

♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-

cardiagn.com
♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-

♦ Trim Removal Wedge -3409-

6. Special Tools 229

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

97 – Wiring
1 Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-
Boxes
⇒ L1.1 ocation Overview - Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-
Boxes”, page 230
⇒ R1.2 emoving and Installing”, page 233
⇒ a1.3 nd Fuse Panels in E-Box, Removing and Installing”,
page 235
⇒ a1.4 nd Fuse Panel Behind Instrument Panel, Removing and
Installing”, page 238
⇒ F1.5 use Panel, Removing and Installing”, page 238

1.1 Component Location Overview - Relay

Panels, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes
⇒ P1.1.1 anels, Fuse Panels and E-Box, Engine Compartment”,

cardiagn.com
page 230
⇒ P1.1.2 anel and Instrument Panel/A-Pillar Fuse Panel”, page
232
⇒ F1.1.3 use Panel on Battery”, page 232

1.1.1 Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-Box, Engine Compartment

230 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Front Cover
❑ For engine compart‐
ment E-box
2 - Nut
❑ 9 Nm
3 - Nut
❑ 9 Nm
4 - Wire
❑ 4.5 Nm
❑ For radiator fan
5 - Wire
❑ 4.5 Nm
❑ For terminal 30
6 - Wire
❑ 4.5 Nm
❑ For electromechanical

cardiagn.com
power steering
7 - Wire
❑ 6 Nm
❑ For battery B+
8 - Wire
❑ 4.5 Nm
❑ For terminal 30
9 - Wire
❑ 6 Nm
❑ For the generator
10 - Fuse Panel A -SA-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
F1.3.2 use Panel ASA, Removing and Installing”, page 237 .
11 - Mounting Bracket
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ F1.3.2 use Panel ASA, Removing and Installing”, page 237 .
12 - Cover
❑ For engine compartment E-box
13 - Relay and Fuse Panel B -SB-
❑ With connecting bracket for fuse panel A
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ a1.3 nd Fuse Panels in E-Box, Removing and Installing”, page
235 .
14 - Wire
❑ 6 Nm
15 - Bracket
❑ For the engine control module
16 - Engine Compartment E-box
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ R1.2 emoving and Installing”, page 233 .

1. Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes 231

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1.1.2 Relay Panel and Instrument Panel/A-Pillar Fuse Panel

Note

The vehicle in the illustration is only a basic outline.

1 - Bracket
❑ For Parking Aid Con‐
trol Module -J446-/Par‐
allel Parking Assistance
Control Module -J791-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
P2.6 arking Aid Con‐
trol ModuleJ446/Paral‐
lel Parking Assistance
Control ModuleJ791
Bracket, Removing and
Installing”, page 246 .

cardiagn.com
2 - Bracket
❑ For the Vehicle Elec‐
trical System Control
Module -J519-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
V2.2 ehicle Electrical
System Control Modu‐
leJ519, Removing and
Installing”, page 241 .
3 - Fuse Panel C -SC-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒ a1.4 nd
Fuse Panel Behind
Instrument Panel, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 238 .
4 - Screw
❑ 4.5 Nm
❑ Quantity: 3

1.1.3 Main Fuse Panel on Battery

232 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Wire to Generator -C-

❑ 12 Nm
❑ With permanent nut
2 - Cap
❑ Clipped in with the
main fuse panel
3 - Wire to Power Steering
Control Module -J500-
❑ 6 Nm
❑ With permanent nut
4 - Main Fuse Panel
❑ Clipped with bracket
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
F1.5 use Panel, Re‐
moving and Installing”,
page 238 .

cardiagn.com
5 - Bracket
❑ Clipped on the Battery
-A-
6 - Positive Cable
❑ With battery terminal
clamp
❑ Overview. Refer to ⇒
-1.1.2 Battery, Vehi‐
cles with Main Fuse
Panel”, page 6 .
7 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm

1.2 E-Box, Removing and Installing

Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-
Removing
– Disconnect the ground cable from the battery when the igni‐
tion is switched off. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Con‐
necting”, page 15 .
– Remove the engine control module and set aside with the
connectors attached. Refer to ⇒ Rep. Gr. 23; Engine Con‐
trol Module; Engine Control Module -J623-, Removing and
Installing or ⇒ Rep. Gr. 24; Engine Control Module; Engine
Control Module -J623-, Removing and Installing.
– Push the release buttons in direction of -arrows-.

1. Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes 233

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the cover -1-.

– Release the mounting tab -2- using a screwdriver.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the cover -1- in the direction of -arrow-.
– Cut the lower cable ties on the wiring harness.

– Release the catches -1, 2 and 4- in direction of -arrow-.

– Remove the fuse panel B -3- and move to the side.
– Remove the nuts -arrows-.

234 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the bracket for the engine control module -1-.

cardiagn.com
– Release the mounting tab -3-.
– Disengage the engine compartment E-box -2- from the
threaded pins.
– Remove the engine compartment E-box -2- upward.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ L1.1 ocation Overview - Relay Panels, Fuse Pan‐
els and E-Boxes”, page 230

1.3 Relay and Fuse Panels in E-Box, Re‐

moving and Installing
⇒ F1.3.1 use Panel BSB, Removing and Installing”, page 235
⇒ F1.3.2 use Panel ASA, Removing and Installing”, page 237

1.3.1 Fuse Panel B -SB-, Removing and In‐

stalling
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-
Removing
– Disconnect the ground cable from the battery when the igni‐
tion is switched off. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Con‐
necting”, page 15 .
– Press the release buttons in direction of -arrow-.

1. Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes 235

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the cover -1-.

– Release the mounting tab -2- using a screwdriver.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the front cover -1- in the direction of -arrow-.
– Mark the wires at the threaded connections for reinstallation.

– Remove the nuts -1, 2, 4, 5 and 6-.

– Remove the bolt -3-.
– Free up the wires -arrow-.
– Cut the lower cable ties on the wiring harness.

236 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release the catches -1, 2 and 4- -arrow-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the fuse panel B -3- and move to the side.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal and note the following:
– Attach and tighten the wires to fuse panel A according to the
markings.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ L1.1 ocation Overview - Relay Panels, Fuse Pan‐
els and E-Boxes”, page 230

1.3.2 Fuse Panel A -SA-, Removing and In‐

stalling
Removing
– Remove the fuse panel B. Refer to ⇒ a1.3 nd Fuse Panels in
E-Box, Removing and Installing”, page 235 .
– Remove the mounting bracket -4- upward from the fuse pan‐
el B -3-.

1. Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes 237

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release the mounting tab -1- in the direction of -arrow-.

– Remove the fuse panel A -2- downward from the fuse panel
B -3-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

1.4 Relay and Fuse Panel Behind Instru‐

ment Panel, Removing and Installing
Removing
– Disconnect the ground cable from the battery when the igni‐
tion is switched off. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Con‐
necting”, page 15 .
– Remove the instrument panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70; Instrument Panel; Instrument Panel, Removing and
Installing.
– Release the mounting tab -2 and 4- in the direction of
-A arrows-.

cardiagn.com
– Remove the Fuse Panel C -SC- -3- in the direction of
-arrow B- from the bracket -1-.
– Remove the wires.

Note

♦ The exact assignment can be found the applicable wiring

diagram. Refer to ⇒ Wiring diagrams, Troubleshooting &
Component locations.
♦ If necessary, take photos of the assignment.

Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

1.5 Main Fuse Panel, Removing and In‐

stalling
Special tools and workshop equipment required

238 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-

The main fuse panel is located in the engine compartment on
the Battery -A-.
Removing
– Disconnect the ground cable from the battery when the igni‐
tion is switched off. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Con‐
necting”, page 15 .
– Unclip the cover -1- over the battery positive terminal.

cardiagn.com
– Release the retaining tabs -3- and open the cover -2-.
– Remove the nuts -4 and 5- and move the wires to the side.
– Remove the nut -7-.
– Release the retaining tab -arrow- and remove the main fuse
panel -6- from the bracket.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ F1.1.3 use Panel on Battery”, page 232

1. Relay Panels, Fuse Panels and E-Boxes 239

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

2 Control Modules
⇒ L2.1 ocation Overview - Control Modules”, page 240
⇒ V2.2 ehicle Electrical System Control ModuleJ519, Removing
and Installing”, page 241
⇒ D2.3 ata Bus on Board Diagnostic InterfaceJ533, Removing
and Installing”, page 243
⇒ f2.4 or Vehicle Electrical System Control ModuleJ519, Re‐
moving and Installing”, page 244
⇒ f2.5 or Vehicle Electrical System Control ModuleJ519, Re‐
placing”, page 245
⇒ P2.6 arking Aid Control ModuleJ446/Parallel Parking Assis‐
tance Control ModuleJ791 Bracket, Removing and Installing”,
page 246
⇒ D2.7 oor Opener Control Module, Removing and Installing”,
page 246
⇒ R2.8 ear Lid Control ModuleJ605, Removing and Installing”,
page 247

cardiagn.com
2.1 Component Location Overview - Control Modules

240 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

1 - Data Bus on Board Diag‐

nostic Interface -J533-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
D2.3 ata Bus on
Board Diagnostic Inter‐
faceJ533, Removing
and Installing”, page
243 .
2 - Bracket
❑ For the Vehicle Elec‐
trical System Control
Module -J519-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
f2.4 or Vehicle Elec‐
trical System Control
ModuleJ519, Removing
and Installing”, page
244 .

cardiagn.com
3 - Vehicle Electrical System
Control Module -J519-
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling. Refer to ⇒
V2.2 ehicle Electrical
System Control Modu‐
leJ519, Removing and
Installing”, page 241 .
4 - Guide
❑ For the center connec‐
tor
5 - Parking Aid Control Module -J446-/Parallel Parking Assistance Control Module -J791-
❑ Parking Aid Control Module -J446- overview. Refer to ⇒ -9.1 Parking Aid”, page 140 .
❑ Parallel Parking Assistance Control Module -J791- overview. Refer to ⇒ -10.1 Parallel Parking Assist”,
page 146 .
6 - Bracket
❑ For Parking Aid Control Module -J446-/Parallel Parking Assistance Control Module -J791-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ P2.6 arking Aid Control ModuleJ446/Parallel Parking Assistance
Control ModuleJ791 Bracket, Removing and Installing”, page 246 .
7 - Garage Door Opener Control Module -J530-
❑ Removing and installing. Refer to ⇒ D2.7 oor Opener Control Module, Removing and Installing”, page
246 .

2.2 Vehicle Electrical System Control Mod‐

ule -J519-, Removing and Installing

Note

If the control module is replaces, perform the adaptation using

the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.

2. Control Modules 241

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent the

ignition from switching on unintentionally.
– Remove the driver side instrument panel cover. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 68; Storage Compartments and
Covers; Driver Side Instrument Panel Cover, Removing and
Installing.
– Remove the A-pillar lower trim panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interi‐
or; Rep. Gr. 70; Vehicle Interior Trim Panels; A-Pillar Trim
Panel, Removing and Installing.
– Remove the footrest. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 70;
Vehicle Interior Trim Panels; Footrest, Removing and Instal‐
ling.
– Unclip the data link connector from the bracket.
– Disconnect the connectors -1, 2 and 3-.

cardiagn.com
– To disconnect the connector, press the catch -1-.

– Pivot the retaining bracket in direction of -arrow- and remove

the connector.

Note

To pivot the retaining bracket at the center connector, the red

locking mechanism must also be pulled all the way out of the
retaining bracket.

– Remove the connector -2- downward from the guide.

242 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release the springs in direction of -arrow-, pivot the vehicle

cardiagn.com
electrical system control module -4- out of the bracket -5-
and remove it downward.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

2.3 Data Bus on Board Diagnostic Inter‐

face -J533-, Removing and Installing

Note

If the control module is replaces, perform the adaptation using

the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent
switching on the ignition unintentionally.
– If equipped, remove the driver side knee airbag. Refer to
⇒ Body Interior; Rep. Gr. 69; Knee Airbags; Knee Airbag
with Igniter, Removing and Installing.
– Remove the driver side footwell vent. Refer to ⇒ Heating,
Ventilation and Air Conditioning; Rep. Gr. 87; Air Routing;
Driver Side Footwell Vent, Removing and Installing.
– Reach upward behind the pedal bracket to disconnect the
connector -1-.

2. Control Modules 243

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– To disconnect the connector press the circlip and remove

the connector.
– Release the retainers in direction of -arrows-.
– Remove the Data Bus On Board Diagnostic Interface -J533-
-3- downward from the bracket -2-.
Installing

cardiagn.com
Install in reverse order of removal.

2.4 Bracket for Vehicle Electrical System

Control Module -J519-, Removing and
Installing
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-
Removing
– Disconnect the ground cable from the battery when the igni‐
tion is switched off. Refer to ⇒ D1.3 isconnecting and Con‐
necting”, page 15 .
– Remove the instrument panel. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70; Instrument Panel; Instrument Panel, Removing and
Installing.
– Cut the cable tie -arrow-.

– Disengage fuse panel C and push it aside. Refer to ⇒

a1.4 nd Fuse Panel Behind Instrument Panel, Removing and
Installing”, page 238 .
– Disconnect the connector from the Front Parking Aid Warn‐
ing Buzzer -H22-.
– Disconnect the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module
-J519- connector. Refer to ⇒ V2.2 ehicle Electrical System
Control ModuleJ519, Removing and Installing”, page 241 .

244 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Remove the bracket for the Parking Aid Control Module

-J446-/Parallel Parking Assistance Control Module -J791-.
Refer to ⇒ P2.6 arking Aid Control ModuleJ446/Parallel
Parking Assistance Control ModuleJ791 Bracket, Removing
and Installing”, page 246 .
– Remove the diagnostic connector by releasing the locking
mechanism on the bracket and removing the bracket out‐
ward.
– Remove the bolts -2, 3 and 6-.

cardiagn.com
– Push the bracket -1- far enough forward from the instrument
panel crossmember until the alignment pins -4 and 5- are
disengaged.
– Cut the cable ties -arrows-.
– Free up the wiring harness on the mount.
– Remove the bracket to the vehicle interior.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.
Tightening Specifications
♦ Refer to ⇒ P1.1.2 anel and Instrument Panel/A-Pillar Fuse
Panel”, page 232

2.5 Bracket for Vehicle Electrical System

Control Module -J519-, Replacing
Removing
– Remove the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module -
J519- bracket. Refer to ⇒ f2.4 or Vehicle Electrical System
Control ModuleJ519, Removing and Installing”, page 244 .
– Remove the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module -
J519-. Refer to ⇒ V2.2 ehicle Electrical System Control Mod‐
uleJ519, Removing and Installing”, page 241 .
– Remove the Front Parking Aid Warning Buzzer -H22-. Refer
to ⇒ F9.3 ront Parking Aid Warning BuzzerH22, Removing
and Installing”, page 142 .
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

2. Control Modules 245

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

2.6 Parking Aid Control Module -J446-/

Parallel Parking Assistance Control
Module -J791- Bracket, Removing and
Installing
Removing
– Remove the Vehicle Electrical System Control Module -
J519-. Refer to ⇒ V2.2 ehicle Electrical System Control Mod‐
uleJ519, Removing and Installing”, page 241 .
– If installed: remove the Parking Aid Control Module -J446-/
Parallel Parking Assistance Control Module -J791-. Refer
to ⇒ P9.2 arking Aid Control ModuleJ446, Removing and
Installing”, page 142 .
– Depending on vehicle equipment remove the fuse and relay
panel present from the bracket -1-.

cardiagn.com
– Release the retainers -arrows- on the bracket for the vehicle
electrical system control module -2-.
– Remove the bracket -1- downward in the direction of
-arrow B- from the bracket for the vehicle electrical system
control module -2-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

2.7 Garage Door Opener Control Module,

Removing and Installing

Note

If the control module is replaces, perform the adaptation using

the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

Removing
– Remove the front bumper cover. Refer to ⇒ Body Exterior;
Rep. Gr. 63; Front Bumper; Bumper Cover, Removing and
Installing.
– Push the catches on the retaining tab -1- together.

246 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– At the same time remove the bracket -5- with the garage

cardiagn.com
door opener control module -3- from the center guide -2-.
– Release and disconnect the connector -6-.
– Release the retaining tab -4- on the bracket -5-.
– At the same time remove the garage door opener control
module -3- in the direction of -arrow- from the bracket -5-.
Installing
Install in reverse order of removal.

2.8 Rear Lid Control Module -J605-, Re‐

moving and Installing

Note

If the control module is replaces, perform the adaptation using

the Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

Removing
– Turn off the ignition and all electrical equipment.
– Move the ignition key outside of the vehicle to prevent the
ignition from switching on unintentionally.
– Lower the rear headliner. Refer to ⇒ Body Interior; Rep.
Gr. 70; Luggage Compartment Trim Panels; Luggage Com‐
partment Side Trim Panel, Removing and Installing.
– Release and disconnect the connectors -2-.

2. Control Modules 247

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

– Release the retainers -A arrows- from the Rear Lid Control

Module -J605- -1-.
– At the same time, push the Rear Lid Control Module -J605-
-1- in the direction of -arrow B- until it stops.
– Remove the Rear Lid Control Module -J605- -1- forward
from the body.
Installing

cardiagn.com
Install in reverse order of removal.

248 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

3 Connectors
⇒ H3.1 arnesses and Connectors, Repairing”, page 249

3.1 Wiring Harnesses and Connectors, Re‐

pairing
⇒ H3.1.1 arnesses and Connectors, Repairing”, page 249
⇒ H3.1.2 ousings and Connectors, Repairing”, page 249

3.1.1 Wiring Harnesses and Connectors, Re‐

pairing
Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep.
Gr. 97; Wiring Harness and Connector Repairs; Wiring Har‐
nesses, Repairing.

3.1.2 Connector Housings and Connectors,

Repairing
Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep.

cardiagn.com
Gr. 97; Wiring Harness and Connector Repairs; Contact Hous‐
ings and Connectors, Repairing.

3. Connectors 249
 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

4 Connector Housings, Releasing and

Disassembling
Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep.
Gr. 97; Wiring Harness and Connector Repairs; Contact Hous‐
ings, Releasing and Disassembling.

cardiagn.com

250 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

5 Antenna Wires, Repairing

Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep.
Gr. 97; Wiring Harness and Connector Repairs; Antenna Wires,
Repairing.

cardiagn.com

5. Antenna Wires, Repairing 251

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

6 Fiber-Optic Cable
Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep.
Gr. 97; Wiring Harness and Connector Repairs; Fiber-Optic Ca‐
bles, Repairing.

cardiagn.com

252 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

7 Vehicle Diagnostic Tester

Refer to ⇒ Electrical Equipment General Information; Rep.
Gr. 97; Vehicle Diagnostic Tester.

cardiagn.com

7. Vehicle Diagnostic Tester 253

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

8 Special Tools
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque Wrench 1410 -VAG1410-

♦ Torque Screwdriver -VAG1624-

cardiagn.com

254 Rep. Gr.97 - Wiring

 Atlas 2020 ➤
Electrical Equipment - Edition 08.2020

9 Revision History
DRUCK NUMBER: K0059322021
Fac‐ Edit Job Fee Notes Quality
tory Edi‐ Type dba Checke
Edi‐ tion ck d By
tion
08.2 09/1 Fac‐ N/A Eric P.
020 8/20 tory
20 Up‐
date
06.2 07/2 Fac‐ N/A Eric P.
020 8/20 tory
20 Up‐
date
09.2 04/2 Re- N/A missing images Tom
019 4/20 re‐ Perry
20 leas
e
09.2 04/2 Lo‐ N/A Basic edits Tom

cardiagn.com
019 4/20 cal Perry
20 Edits
09.2 10/2 Fac‐ N/A Eric P.
019 2/20 tory
19 New

9. Revision History 255

 Cautions & Warnings
Please read these WARNINGS and CAUTIONS before proceeding with maintenance and repair
work. You must answer that you have read and you understand these WARNINGS and
CAUTIONS before you will be allowed to view this information.

 If you lack the skills, tools and equipment, or a suitable workshop for any procedure described in this manual,
we suggest you leave such repairs to an authorized Volkswagen retailer or other qualified shop. We especially
urge you to consult an authorized Volkswagen retailer before beginning repairs on any vehicle that may still be
covered wholly or in part by any of the extensive warranties issued by Volkswagen.

 Disconnect the battery negative terminal (ground strap) whenever you work on the fuel system or the electrical
system. Do not smoke or work near heaters or other fire hazards. Keep an approved fire extinguisher handy.

 Volkswagen is constantly improving its vehicles and sometimes these changes, both in parts and specifications,
are made applicable to earlier models. Therefore, part numbers listed in this manual are for reference only.
Always check with your authorized Volkswagen retailer parts department for the latest information.

 Any time the battery has been disconnected on an automatic transmission vehicle, it will be necessary to
reestablish Transmission Control Module (TCM) basic settings using the Volkswagen Factory Approved Scan
Tool (ST).

cardiagn.com
 Never work under a lifted vehicle unless it is solidly supported on stands designed for the purpose. Do not
support a vehicle on cinder blocks, hollow tiles or other props that may crumble under continuous load. Never
work under a vehicle that is supported solely by a jack. Never work under the vehicle while the engine is
running.

 For vehicles equipped with an anti-theft radio, be sure of the correct radio activation code before disconnecting
the battery or removing the radio. If the wrong code is entered when the power is restored, the radio may lock
up and become inoperable, even if the correct code is used in a later attempt.

 If you are going to work under a vehicle on the ground, make sure that the ground is level. Block the wheels to
keep the vehicle from rolling. Disconnect the battery negative terminal (ground strap) to prevent others from
starting the vehicle while you are under it

 Do not attempt to work on your vehicle if you do not feel well. You increase the danger of injury to yourself and
others if you are tired, upset or have taken medicine or any other substances that may impair you or keep you
from being fully alert.

 Never run the engine unless the work area is well ventilated. Carbon monoxide (CO) kills.

 Always observe good workshop practices. Wear goggles when you operate machine tools or work with acid.
Wear goggles, gloves and other protective clothing whenever the job requires working with harmful substances.

 Tie long hair behind your head. Do not wear a necktie, a scarf, loose clothing, or a necklace when you work
near machine tools or running engines. If your hair, clothing, or jewelry were to get caught in the machinery,
severe injury could result.

 Do not re-use any fasteners that are worn or deformed in normal use. Some fasteners are designed to be used
only once and are unreliable and may fail if used a second time. This includes, but is not limited to, nuts, bolts,
washers, circlips and cotter pins. Always follow the recommendations in this manual - replace these fasteners
with new parts where indicated, and any other time it is deemed necessary by inspection.

Page 1 of 3
© 2018 Volkswagen of America, Inc.
All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is based on the latest information available at the time of printing and is subject to the copyright and other
intellectual property rights of Volkswagen of America, Inc., its affiliated companies and its licensors. All rights are reserved to make changes at any time without
notice. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording, or otherwise, nor may these materials be modified or reposted to other sites, without the prior expressed written permission of the publisher.

Version 2.0
 Cautions & Warnings
 Illuminate the work area adequately but safely. Use a portable safety light for working inside or under the
vehicle. Make sure the bulb is enclosed by a wire cage. The hot filament of an accidentally broken bulb can
ignite spilled fuel or oil.

 Friction materials such as brake pads and clutch discs may contain asbestos fibers. Do not create dust by
grinding, sanding, or by cleaning with compressed air. Avoid breathing asbestos fibers and asbestos dust.
Breathing asbestos can cause serious diseases such as asbestosis or cancer, and may result in death.

 Finger rings should be removed so that they cannot cause electrical shorts, get caught in running machinery, or
be crushed by heavy parts.

 Before starting a job, make certain that you have all the necessary tools and parts on hand. Read all the
instructions thoroughly; do not attempt shortcuts. Use tools that are appropriate to the work and use only
replacement parts meeting Volkswagen specifications. Makeshift tools, parts and procedures will not make good
repairs.

 Catch draining fuel, oil or brake fluid in suitable containers. Do not use empty food or beverage containers that
might mislead someone into drinking from them. Store flammable fluids away from fire hazards. Wipe up spills
at once, but do not store the oily rags, which can ignite and burn spontaneously.

cardiagn.com
 Use pneumatic and electric tools only to loosen threaded parts and fasteners. Never use these tools to tighten
fasteners, especially on light alloy parts. Always use a torque wrench to tighten fasteners to the tightening
torque listed.

 Keep sparks, lighted matches, and open flame away from the top of the battery. If escaping hydrogen gas is
ignited, it will ignite gas trapped in the cells and cause the battery to explode.

 Be mindful of the environment and ecology. Before you drain the crankcase, find out the proper way to dispose
of the oil. Do not pour oil onto the ground, down a drain, or into a stream, pond, or lake. Consult local
ordinances that govern the disposal of wastes.

 The air-conditioning (A/C) system is filled with a chemical refrigerant that is hazardous. The A/C system should
be serviced only by trained automotive service technicians using approved refrigerant recovery/recycling
equipment, trained in related safety precautions, and familiar with regulations governing the discharging and
disposal of automotive chemical refrigerants.

 Before doing any electrical welding on vehicles equipped with anti-lock brakes (ABS), disconnect the battery
negative terminal (ground strap) and the ABS control module connector.

 Do not expose any part of the A/C system to high temperatures such as open flame. Excessive heat will
increase system pressure and may cause the system to burst.

 When boost-charging the battery, first remove the fuses for the Engine Control Module (ECM), the Transmission
Control Module (TCM), the ABS control module, and the trip computer. In cases where one or more of these
components is not separately fused, disconnect the control module connector(s).

 Some of the vehicles covered by this manual are equipped with a supplemental restraint system (SRS), that
automatically deploys an airbag in the event of a frontal impact. The airbag is operated by an explosive device.
Handled improperly or without adequate safeguards, it can be accidentally activated and cause serious personal
injury. To guard against personal injury or airbag system failure, only trained Volkswagen Service technicians
should test, disassemble or service the airbag system.

Page 2 of 3
© 2018 Volkswagen of America, Inc.
All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is based on the latest information available at the time of printing and is subject to the copyright and other
intellectual property rights of Volkswagen of America, Inc., its affiliated companies and its licensors. All rights are reserved to make changes at any time without
notice. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording, or otherwise, nor may these materials be modified or reposted to other sites, without the prior expressed written permission of the publisher.

Version 2.0
 Cautions & Warnings
 Do not quick-charge the battery (for boost starting) for longer than one minute, and do not exceed 16.5 volts at
the battery with the boosting cables attached. Wait at least one minute before boosting the battery a second
time.

 Never use a test light to conduct electrical tests of the airbag system. The system must only be tested by trained
Volkswagen Service technicians using the Volkswagen Factory Approved Scan Tool (ST) or an approved
equivalent. The airbag unit must never be electrically tested while it is not installed in the vehicle.

 Some aerosol tire inflators are highly flammable. Be extremely cautious when repairing a tire that may have
been inflated using an aerosol tire inflator. Keep sparks, open flame or other sources of ignition away from the
tire repair area. Inflate and deflate the tire at least four times before breaking the bead from the rim. Completely
remove the tire from the rim before attempting any repair.

 When driving or riding in an airbag-equipped vehicle, never hold test equipment in your hands or lap while the
vehicle is in motion. Objects between you and the airbag can increase the risk of injury in an accident.

I have read and I understand these Cautions and Warnings.

cardiagn.com

Page 3 of 3
© 2018 Volkswagen of America, Inc.
All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is based on the latest information available at the time of printing and is subject to the copyright and other
intellectual property rights of Volkswagen of America, Inc., its affiliated companies and its licensors. All rights are reserved to make changes at any time without
notice. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording, or otherwise, nor may these materials be modified or reposted to other sites, without the prior expressed written permission of the publisher.

Version 2.0